566122

Smart for two 2014 Handleiding

209
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/228
Pagina verder
Let the fun begin!
Take a moment to familiarize yourself with
your smart fortwo coupé or smart fortwo
cabriolet and read through the Operator’s
Manual before driving. This will ensure
you get more fun out of your vehicle - and
avoid danger to yourself and others.
This Operator’s Manual contains very
important information about how to safely
and effectively operate the vehicle. It is
important to note that this is a unique
vehicle. It is obviously smaller than most
vehicles on the road and, for this reason,
it can provide both unique experiences and
special responsibilities. It is extremely
important that you read this entire Manual
and that you familiarize yourself with how
the vehicle works. Some of the features may
be different from the features on other
compact passenger vehicles. Should you
have any questions about the vehicle and
how to safely operate its features, please
use common sense and contact smart dealer
representatives, who are available to help
you.
smart is a vehicle manufactured by
Daimler, distributed in the United States
by Mercedes-Benz USA LLC, and in Canada
by Mercedes-Benz Canada, and sold and
serviced by independent, authorized smart
centers.
Because of this vehicle’s unique charac-
teristics, we strongly recommend that you
service and maintain the vehicle only at
authorized smart service facilities. A list
of service facilities is available by call-
ing smart Customer Assistance represen-
tatives at:
1‑800‑762‑7887 (in the USA)
1‑877‑627‑8004 (in Canada)
Although we cannot prevent you from serv-
icing the vehicle at facilities other than
smart authorized facilities, this is not
advisable.
Optional extras are identified with an
asterisk*. The equipment in your vehicle
may vary depending on the model, version
and availability. smart is constantly
bringing its vehicles up to the very latest
state of the art and reserves the right to
modify them in form, equipment and engi-
neering.
Should you find that a particular feature in
this manual is important to your decision
to purchase the vehicle, we recommend that
you personally check the vehicle to ensure
that this feature has been installed before
buying the vehicle.
The Operator’s Manual and Scheduled Main-
tenance Guide/Warranty Booklet (USA only)
or Service/Warranty Booklet (Canada only)
belong to the vehicle. You should always
keep these documents in the vehicle and
make sure you pass them on to the next owner
if and when you sell your smart.
Please contact an authorized smart center
if you have any further questions.
The Technical Documentation team at
Daimler wishes you many happy hours at the
wheel.
4515840300
É4515840300oËÍ
Index ............................................ 4
Introduction ................................. 13
At a glance .................................... 19
Safety .......................................... 29
Controls ....................................... 51
Operation .................................... 115
Practical hints ............................. 157
Technical data ............................. 211
Contents
3
A
ABS (Antilock Brake System) ............. 46
Indicator lamp ........................ 163
Accessory weight .......................... 140
Accidents
Air bags .................................. 33
Additives
Engine oil .............................. 221
Gasoline ................................ 222
Address change .............................. 15
Air bags ....................................... 33
Children .................................. 33
Front, driver and passenger ......... 36
Front, passenger ....................... 36
Head-thorax ............................. 37
Knee bag .................................. 36
Passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp ..................... 27, 41
Safety guidelines ...................... 35
SRS indicator lamp ................... 166
Thorax-pelvis .......................... 38
Window curtain ......................... 38
Air conditioning
see HVAC ................................ 102
Air conditioning refrigerant .......... 221
Air pressure
see Tire inflation pressure
Air pressure (tires) ....................... 141
Air vents ..................................... 104
Alarm system
see Anti-theft systems
Ambient lighting* .......................... 68
Anticorrosion/antifreeze ............... 223
Antiglare, Interior rear view mir-
ror .............................................. 62
Antilock Brake System
see ABS
Anti-theft systems ......................... 48
Anti-theft warning system ........... 48
Electronic immobilizer .............. 48
Interior motion sensor ............... 49
Tow-away alarm ......................... 49
Aquaplaning
see Hydroplaning
Armrest ........................................ 59
Aspect ratio (tires) ....................... 141
Audio system ................................. 98
Basic ...................................... 99
Navigation/multimedia .............. 99
Automatic headlamp mode ................ 65
Automatic locking .......................... 53
Automatic transmission ................... 81
Display message ....................... 159
Driving tips ............................. 83
Emergency operation (limp-
home mode) ...............................85
Gear selector lever .................... 81
Gear selector lever positions...... 83
Gearshift pattern ...................... 81
Hill-start assist system .............. 84
Manual gearshifting .................. 84
Shifting procedure .................... 82
Auxiliary instruments
Cockpit clock ............................91
Tachometer ...............................91
AUX socket .................................... 99
B
Backrest
see Seats
Backup lamp ................................. 180
Bar (air pressure unit) ................... 141
Battery
Charging ................................ 196
Indicator lamp ........................ 168
Jump starting .......................... 199
Removing and installing ............ 196
Battery (key)
Replacing the transmitter bat-
tery ....................................... 177
Bead (tire) ................................... 141
Brake fluid .................................. 124
Checking ................................ 124
Brake lamp .................................. 180
Brake pedal .................................. 80
Brakes ........................................ 145
Parking brake ........................... 79
Warning lamp .......................... 164
Break-in period ........................... 116
Bulbs
Front ..................................... 179
Rear ...................................... 180
Replacing ............................... 178
4
Index
C
CAC (Customer Assistance Center) ...... 16
California retail buyers and les-
sees, important notice for ............... 14
Can holder
see Cup holder
Cargo compartment cover blind ........ 107
Catalytic converter ....................... 147
CD player ..................................... 98
Center console .............................. 26
Central locking
Automatic ................................ 53
Locking/unlocking from inside .... 54
Certification label ....................... 214
Children in the vehicle ................... 42
Air bags .................................. 33
Indicator lamp, passenger front
air bag off .......................... 41, 173
Infant and child restraint sys-
tems ....................................... 42
OCS (Occupant Classification
System) ................................... 39
Safety notes ............................. 42
Tether anchorage points ............. 44
Child safety
see Children in the vehicle
Cigarette lighter .......................... 114
Climate control
see HVAC ................................ 102
Clock ........................................... 88
Cockpit ........................................ 20
Coin holder ................................. 110
Cold tire inflation pressure ............ 141
Combination switch ........................ 66
Control system
Consumption menu ..................... 95
Control lever ............................ 93
Introduction ............................ 92
Menus and submenus ................... 94
Messages menu .......................... 96
Multifunction display ................ 93
Odometer menu .......................... 94
Reset menu ............................... 95
Settings menu ........................... 96
Start menu ............................... 95
Time menu ................................ 97
Coolant
Anticorrosion/antifreeze .......... 223
Capacities ............................. 220
Checking level......................... 122
Temperature warning lamp ......... 170
Coolant temperature ...................... 150
Copyright ..................................... 17
Cruise control ............................. 100
Cup holder ................................... 107
Curb weight ................................. 141
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ...... 16
D
Dashboard
see Instrument cluster
Data recording ...............................17
Daytime running lamp mode .............. 66
Deep water
see Standing water
Defroster
Rear window ............................ 106
Windshield ............................. 106
Department of Transportation
see DOT
Dimensions (vehicle)
see Vehicle specification
Direction of rotation (tires) ........... 134
Display messages
Automatic transmission............. 159
Electronic immobilizer ............. 159
Door control panel ......................... 27
Door handles ................................. 27
Doors
Locking/unlocking from outside ... 53
Opening from inside .................. 54
DOT (Department of Transporta-
tion) ..................................... 139, 141
Drinking and driving ..................... 144
Driving
Abroad ................................... 151
Coolant temperature ................. 150
Hydroplaning .......................... 148
Instructions ....................... 77, 144
In winter ................................ 149
Safety systems .......................... 46
Index
5
Through standing water ............. 149
Tips, automatic transmission...... 83
Driving and parking
Safety notes .............................. 77
Driving safety systems .................... 46
ABS ........................................ 46
ESP
®
....................................... 47
Hydraulic brake assistant ........... 47
E
Electrical system
Improper work on or modifica-
tions ....................................... 15
Power outlet ............................ 114
Electronic immobilizer .................. 48
Display message ....................... 159
Electronic Power Steering
see EPS
Electronic Stability Program
see ESP
®
Emergency, in case of
Hazard warning flasher .......... 48, 69
Roadside Assistance .................. 14
Emergency operation (limp-home
mode) .......................................... 85
Emergency Tensioning Device
see ETD
Emission control .......................... 150
Information label ..................... 213
System warranties ...................... 13
Engine
Break-in recommendations ......... 116
Compartment ............................ 117
Compartment cover .................... 117
Electronics ............................. 212
Malfunction indicator lamp ........ 170
Number .................................. 214
Starting .................................. 77
Turning off .............................. 81
Engine coolant
see Coolant
Engine oil
Adding ................................... 119
Additives ............................... 221
Checking level......................... 118
Consumption ............................ 118
Oil dipstick ............................ 119
EPS (Electronic Power Steering)
Warning lamp ........................... 167
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program) ... 47
Warning lamp ........................... 167
ETD (Emergency Tensioning Device) ... 33
Safety guidelines ...................... 35
Exterior lamp switch ...................... 64
Exterior lighting
Overview ................................ 179
Exterior rear view mirrors .............. 61
F
Flat tire ..................................... 186
Fluids
Capacities ............................. 220
Engine coolant ........................ 220
Engine oil .............................. 220
Fog lamps ................................ 68, 179
Front air bags
see Air bags
Front compartment ........................ 120
Front lamps
Overview ................................ 179
Fuel ........................................... 146
Additives ............................... 222
Capacity, fuel tank ................... 220
Fuel filler flap and cap ............. 116
Fuel level display ..................... 89
Premium unleaded gaso-
line ........................... 117, 220, 221
Refueling ............................... 116
Requirements .......................... 221
Fuel cap
Indicator lamp ........................ 169
Fuel filler flap ............................. 116
Fuel level display .......................... 89
Fuel tank
Capacity ................................ 220
Fuel filler flap and cap ............. 116
Refueling ............................... 116
Fuse chart ................................... 207
Fuses ......................................... 205
6
Index
G
Gasoline
see Fuel
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) ...... 141
Gear selector lever ......................... 81
Transmission positions.............. 83
Global locking/unlocking ................ 53
Glove box .................................... 110
Gross Axle Weight Rating
see GAWR
Gross Vehicle Weight
see GVW
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
see GVWR
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) ............. 141
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) .. 141
H
Halogen headlamps
see Headlamps
Hazard warning flasher ................... 69
Headlamps
Automatic headlamp mode ............ 65
Daytime running lamp mode ......... 66
High-beam flasher ..................... 67
High-beam headlamps ................. 67
Low-beam headlamps .................. 65
Switch ..................................... 64
Head-thorax air bags ...................... 37
Heated exterior rear view mirrors ..... 62
Heating
see HVAC ................................ 102
Height adjustment
Seats ...................................... 59
High-beam flasher .......................... 67
High-beam headlamps ................ 67, 179
Indicator lamp ........................ 169
High-mounted brake lamp ............... 180
Hill-start assist system .................. 84
HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, Air
Conditioning) .............................. 102
Air distribution ...................... 105
Air recirculation ..................... 107
Air vents ................................ 104
Air volume .............................. 106
Defrosting .............................. 106
Rear window defroster ............... 106
Temperature ............................ 104
Hydraulic brake assistant ................ 47
Hydroplaning ............................... 148
I
Identification labels .................... 213
Identification number, vehicle
(VIN) .......................................... 214
Infant and child restraint systems
see Children in the vehicle
Inflation pressure
see Tires, Inflation pressure
Inside door handle ......................... 54
Instrument cluster ..................... 21, 23
Illumination ............................ 92
Lamps, indicator and warning ..... 162
Instrument panel
see Instrument cluster
Instruments and controls
see Cockpit
Interior motion sensor .................... 49
Interior rear view mirror ................ 62
Interior storage spaces
see Storage compartments
Intermittent wiping
Rear window wiper ..................... 71
Windshield wipers ..................... 70
J
Jump-starting .............................. 199
K
Key ............................................. 52
Loss of ................................... 174
Replacing the transmitter bat-
tery ....................................... 177
Kilopascal (air pressure unit) ......... 141
Knee bag ...................................... 36
Index
7
L
Labels ........................................ 213
Emission control information ..... 213
Lamps, exterior
Exterior lamp switch .................. 64
Switching on/off ....................... 64
Lamps, indicator and warning
ABS ....................................... 163
Battery ................................... 168
Brakes ................................... 164
Coolant temperature ................. 170
Engine malfunction ...................170
EPS ........................................ 167
ESP
®
...................................... 167
Fog lamps ................................ 68
Fuel cap ................................. 169
High-beam headlamps ............... 169
Low-beam headlamps ................. 169
Low tire pressure/TPMS mal-
function telltale ...................... 171
Oil pressure ............................ 171
Overview (kilometers) ................ 24
Overview (miles) ....................... 22
Passenger front air bag off .... 36, 173
Seat belt telltale ..................... 165
SRS ........................................ 166
Turn signals ............................ 169
License plate lamps ....................... 180
Lighter
see Cigarette lighter
Lighting ...................................... 64
Ambient lighting* ..................... 68
Coming home function ................. 67
Daytime running lamp mode ......... 66
Exterior .................................. 64
Interior .................................. 69
Loading
see Vehicle loading
Locking the vehicle ........................ 52
Manually ................................. 176
Loss of
Key ........................................ 174
Service and Warranty Informa-
tion booklet ............................ 212
Low-beam headlamps ................. 65, 179
Exterior lamp switch .................. 64
Indicator lamp ........................ 169
Switching on ............................ 65
M
Main odometer display .................... 87
Maintenance ..................................14
Service interval display ............. 90
Malfunction
Electronic immobilizer ............. 159
Shifting system ....................... 159
Manual headlamp mode (Low-beam
headlamps) ................................... 65
Maximum loaded vehicle weight ....... 141
Maximum load rating (tires) ............ 141
Maximum permissible tire infla-
tion pressure ............................... 141
Mirrors
Exterior rear view mirrors .......... 61
Interior rear view mirror ........... 62
MON (Motor Octane Number) ............. 221
Motor Octane Number
see MON
Multifunction display ..................... 86
N
Normal occupant weight ................. 142
Number, vehicle identification
(VIN) .......................................... 214
O
Occupant Classification System
see OCS (Occupant Classifica-
tion System)
Occupant distribution ................... 142
Occupant safety
Air bags .................................. 33
Children and air bags ................ 33
Children in the vehicle .............. 42
Infant and child restraint sys-
tems ....................................... 42
Introduction ............................ 30
OCS (Occupant Classification
System) ................................... 39
Passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp ......................... 39
8
Index
Seat belts ............................ 31, 35
SRS indicator lamp, malfunction .166
OCS (Occupant Classification Sys-
tem) ............................................ 39
Self-test ................................. 41
Oil
see Engine oil
Oil level
see Engine oil, Checking level
On-board Diagnostics Socket (OBD) ... 213
Operating safety ............................ 15
Outside temperature display ............ 89
Overhead control panel .................... 27
P
Paintwork care ............................. 155
Panic alarm .................................. 45
Parcel nets ............................. 107, 111
Parking ........................................ 79
Parking brake ................................ 79
Parking lamps .............................. 179
Parts service ............................... 212
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
see Passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp
Passenger front air bag ................... 36
Passenger front air bag off indica-
tor lamp ............................. 27, 36, 173
Passenger safety
see Occupant safety
Passenger seat ...............................60
Pedals ........................................ 144
Power assistance .......................... 144
Power outlet ................................. 114
Power washer ............................... 154
Practical hints
Battery .................................. 196
Display messages..................... 158
Flat tire ................................. 186
Fuses ..................................... 205
Jump starting .......................... 199
Replacing bulbs ....................... 178
Replacing transmitter battery .... 177
Replacing wiper blades ............. 184
Towing ................................... 202
Unlocking/locking manually ....... 176
Warning and indicator
lamps ............................... 162, 173
What to do if ............................ 162
Where will I find...?................. 158
Premium unleaded gasoline ............. 221
Problems with your vehicle .............. 16
Product information ....................... 13
Production options weight .............. 142
PSI (air pressure unit) ................... 142
R
Radio .......................................... 98
Radio transmitters ........................ 150
Rain-light sensor .......................... 70
Rear lamps
Overview ................................ 180
Rear window defroster ................... 106
Rear window wiper/washer ................ 71
Replacing wiper blade .............. 184
Recommended tire inflation pres-
sure ..................................... 125, 142
Refrigerant, air conditioning ......... 221
Refueling .................................... 116
Remote control
see Key
Replacing bulbs ............................ 178
Reporting safety defects .................. 16
Research Octane Number
see RON
Reserve fuel indicator .................... 91
Restraint systems
see Occupant safety
Rims ..................................... 142, 216
Roadside Assistance ....................... 14
RON (Research Octane Number) ......... 221
Roof
see Soft top system
S
Safety
Driving safety systems ............... 46
Occupant safety ......................... 30
Reporting defects ...................... 16
Safety belts
see Seat belts
Seat belt force limiter .................... 33
Index
9
Seat belts ..................................... 31
Children in the vehicle .............. 42
Fastening ................................ 62
Proper use of ............................ 31
Safety guidelines ...................... 35
Safety notes .............................. 31
Telltale ................................. 165
Seat heating ................................. 60
Seating capacity ........................... 131
Seats ........................................... 58
Adjustment ............................... 59
Armrest ................................... 59
Heating ................................... 60
Passenger seat .......................... 60
Self-test
OCS (Occupant Classification
System) .................................... 41
SRS ......................................... 30
Service
see Maintenance
Service, parts .............................. 212
Service and warranty
Booklet .................................. 212
Service flap ................................ 120
Service interval display ................. 90
Service life (tires) ....................... 134
Side marker lamps ......................... 179
Sidewall (tires) ............................ 142
Side windows
Operation ................................ 76
Signs and labels ........................... 213
smart surround sound system ........... 100
Snow chains ................................. 143
Snow tires
see Winter tires
Soft top system ...............................71
Cleaning the soft top fabric ....... 155
Locking rear soft top manually .... 177
Mounting the side rails .............. 75
Opening and closing the rear
soft top ............................... 56, 73
Opening and closing the
retractable soft top ............... 56, 72
Removing the side rails .............. 74
Storing the side rails ................ 75
Sound package .............................. 100
SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-
tem)
Indicator lamp ........................ 166
Standing water, driving through ...... 149
Starter switch positions .................. 57
Starting the engine ........................ 77
Status indicator ............................ 90
Steering wheel gearshift control ...... 25
Storage compartments .................... 109
Coin holder ............................. 110
Door pockets ............................110
Drawer .................................... 111
Glove box ................................ 110
in the tailgate ......................... 111
Parcel nets .............................. 111
Storage tray in center console ..... 111
Storage trays next to steering
wheel ..................................... 110
Storing tires ............................... 135
Sun screen ................................... 113
Sun visors ................................... 113
T
Tailgate
Closing ............................... 55, 57
Opening .............................. 54, 56
Tail lamps ................................... 180
Technical data
Air conditioning refrigerant ..... 221
Brake fluid ............................. 221
Coolant .................................. 223
Engine oil additives ................. 221
Engine oils ............................. 220
Fuel requirements .................... 221
Gasoline additives ................... 222
Identification labels ................ 213
Premium unleaded gasoline ........ 221
Rims and tires ......................... 216
Service fluids and capacities ..... 218
Vehicle specification (model
BRABUS) ................................. 216
Vehicle specification (model
passion) ................................. 215
Vehicle specification (model
pure) ..................................... 215
Windshield/rear window washer
system ............................. 220, 222
10
Index
Technical data (dimensions)
see Vehicle specification
Technical data (weights)
see Vehicle specification
Temperature
Coolant .................................. 150
Interior temperature ................ 104
Outside ................................... 89
Tether anchorage points
see Children in the vehicle
Thorax-pelvis side air bags ............. 38
Tightening torque
Wheels ................................... 136
TIN (Tire Identification Num-
ber) ...................................... 139, 142
Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard ............................................ 130
Tire and loading terminology .......... 140
Tire Identification Number
see TIN
Tire inflation pressure
Checking ................................ 127
Important notes on .................... 126
Placard on driver’s door B-pil-
lar ........................................ 130
Tire labeling ............................... 136
Tire load rating ........................... 142
Tire ply composition and material
used ........................................... 142
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ........................................ 127
Tire repair kit ....................... 158, 186
Tires .................................... 124, 216
Air pressure ........................... 125
Care and maintenance ............... 134
Cleaning ................................ 135
Direction of rotation, spinning .. 134
Driving instructions ................. 147
Flat tire ................................. 186
Important notes on tire infla-
tion pressure .......................... 126
Inflation pressure .............. 126, 127
Information placard ................. 130
Inspection .............................. 134
Labeling ................................ 136
Load rating ............................. 142
Ply composition and material
used ...................................... 142
Problems under-/overinflation ... 126
Retreads ................................. 124
Rims and tires (technical data) ... 216
Rotation ................................. 136
Service life ............................ 134
Sizes ..................................... 216
Snow chains ............................ 143
Speed rating ................ 138, 142, 148
Storing .................................. 135
Temperature ...................... 126, 136
Terminology ............................ 140
Tire Identification Number .. 139, 142
Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem (TPMS) .............................. 127
Traction ..................... 135, 142, 148
Tread ..................................... 142
Tread depth ....................... 134, 143
Treadwear indicators .......... 134, 143
Vehicle maximum load on ........... 143
Wheel change ........................... 194
Winter tires ...................... 143, 216
Tire speed rating .................... 138, 142
Top tether
see Children in the vehicle
Total load limit ........................... 142
Tow-away alarm ............................. 49
Towing ....................................... 202
Traction ................................ 142, 148
Transmission
see Automatic transmission
Transmission position indicator ...... 87
Transmitting power values .............. 212
Traveling abroad .......................... 151
Tread (tires) ................................ 142
Tread depth (tires) .................. 134, 143
Treadwear indicators (tires) ..... 134, 143
Trip odometer, resetting ................. 90
Turning off the engine .................... 81
Turn signal lamps ......................... 179
Turn signals ..................................67
Indicator lamps ....................... 169
Index
11
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards .............................. 135, 143
Unleaded gasoline, premium ........... 221
Unlocking the vehicle ..................... 52
Manually ................................. 176
USB socket .................................... 99
V
Vehicle
Bulbs ..................................... 178
Care ...................................... 151
Identification Number (VIN) ....... 214
Locking/unlocking.................... 52
Modifications and alterations,
Operating safety ....................... 15
Towing ................................... 202
Unlocking/locking manually ....... 176
Vehicle dimensions
see Vehicle specification
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) .......................................... 214
Vehicle lighting ............................64
Vehicle loading
Instructions ............................ 112
Load limit .............................. 131
Roof rack ................................ 112
Terminology ............................ 140
Vehicle maximum load on the tire .... 143
Vehicle specification
Model BRABUS .......................... 216
Model passion ......................... 215
Model pure .............................. 215
Vehicle washing
see Vehicle care
Vehicle weights
see Vehicle specification
Ventilation
see HVAC ................................ 102
W
Warning signals
Anti-theft warning system .......... 175
Brake pads .............................. 176
Door ...................................... 175
Parking .................................. 176
Seat belt reminder system .... 165, 175
Warranty coverage ......................... 212
Warranty information ...................... 13
Washer fluid
Mixing ratio ........................... 222
Refilling ............................... 123
Wiping .................................... 71
Washer jet nozzles ......................... 186
Washing the vehicle ....................... 151
Weights (vehicle)
see Vehicle specification
Wheel change ............................... 194
Wheel cover ................................. 194
Wheels, sizes ............................... 216
Wheels, Tires and .......................... 124
Where will I find...?
Tire repair kit ........................ 158
Window curtain air bags .................. 38
Windshield
Washer fluid ....................... 71, 222
Wipers .................................... 70
Windshield wipers .......................... 70
Adjusting washer jet nozzles ...... 186
Rain-light sensor ...................... 70
Replacing wiper blades ............. 184
Winter driving
Driving instructions ................ 149
Snow chains ............................ 143
Tires ..................................... 143
Winter tires ........................... 143, 216
12
Index
Product information
We recommend using Genuine smart Parts as
well as conversion parts and accessories
explicitly approved by smart for your
vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine
their reliability, safety and special suit-
ability for smart vehicles.
We are unable to make an assessment for
other products and therefore cannot be
held responsible for them, even if in indi-
vidual cases an official approval or
authorization by governmental or other
agencies should exist. Use of such parts
and accessories could adversely affect the
safety, performance or reliability of your
vehicle. We strongly recommend that you
not use them.
Genuine smart Parts as well as conversion
parts and accessories approved by us are
available at your authorized smart center
where you will receive comprehensive
information about use and installation of
appropriate parts.
Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great
deal of useful information. We urge you to
read it carefully and familiarize yourself
with the vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service life
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the
instructions and warnings contained in
this manual. Ignoring them could result in
damage to the vehicle or personal injury to
you or others. Vehicle damage caused by
failure to follow instructions is not cov-
ered by the smart Limited Warranty.
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual.
Therefore, you may find explanations for
optional equipment not installed in your
vehicle. If you have any questions about the
operation of any equipment, your author-
ized smart center will be glad to demon-
strate the proper procedures.
We continuously strive to improve our
product, and ask for your understanding
that we reserve the right to make changes
in design and equipment. Therefore,
information, illustrations and descrip-
tions in this Operator’s Manual might dif-
fer from your vehicle.
Optional equipment is also described in
this manual, including operating instruc-
tions wherever necessary. Since they are
special-order items, the descriptions and
illustrations herein may vary slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
If there are any equipment details that are
not shown or described in this Operator’s
Manual, your authorized smart center will
be glad to inform you of correct care and
operating procedures.
The Operator’s Manual and Maintenance/
Warranty Booklet (USA only) or Service/
Warranty Booklet (Canada only) are impor-
tant documents and should be kept with the
vehicle.
Warranty information
The smart USA Warranty booklet (USA only)
or the Warranty booklet (Canada only) con-
tains detailed information about the war-
ranties covering your smart, including:
R
smart USA Limited Warranty (USA only)
R
New Vehicle Limited Warranty (Canada
only)
R
Emission System Warranty
R
Emission Performance Warranty
R
Corrosion Warranty
R
California, Connecticut, Maine, Massa-
chusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode
Island, and Vermont Emission Control
System Warranty
R
smartmove Assistance (Canada only)
R
State Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon
Laws, USA only)
>> Introduction.
13
Important notice for California retail
buyers and lessees of smart automo-
biles
Under California law you may be entitled
to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund
of the purchase price or lease price, if
Mercedes-Benz USA LLC and/or its author-
ized repair or service facilities fail to
fix one or more substantial defects or mal-
functions in the vehicle that are covered
by its express warranty after a reasonable
number of repair attempts. During the
period of 18 months from original delivery
of the vehicle or the accumulation of
18 000 miles (approximately 29 000 km) on
the odometer of the vehicle, whichever
occurs first, a reasonable number of repair
attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following
occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or mal-
function results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily
injury if the vehicle is driven, that
defect or malfunction has been subject
to repair two or more times, and you
have directly notified Mercedes-Benz
USA LLC in writing of the need for its
repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or mal-
function of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have
directly notified us in writing of the
need for its repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
of repair of the same or different sub-
stantial defects or malfunctions for a
cumulative total of more than 30 cal-
endar days.
Written notification should not be sent to
a dealer, it should be addressed to:
Mercedes-Benz USA LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645
Maintenance
The Scheduled Maintenance Guide (USA) and
Service Booklet (Canada) describes all the
necessary maintenance work which should
be performed at regular intervals. It is
important that you service your vehicle in
accordance with the prescribed mainte-
nance schedule. Failure to do so may render
your vehicle unsafe, it may affect the dura-
bility of the vehicle, and it may otherwise
void the limited, express warranty.
Always have the Scheduled Maintenance
Guide (USA) or Service Booklet (Canada)
with you when you take the vehicle to your
authorized smart center for service. The
service advisor will record each service in
the booklet for you.
Roadside Assistance
The smartmove Assistance (Canada) and
smart 1 service (USA) Program provides
factory trained technical help in the event
of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Road-
side Assistance number
1-800-762-7887 (in the USA)
1-877-627-8004 (in Canada)
will be answered by smart Customer Assis-
tance Representatives 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.
Roadside Assistance will be provided in
accordance with standard program guide-
lines which include providing service to
the vehicle up to a reasonable distance
from a paved roadway. We will make every
effort to assist in a breakdown situation,
however, the accessibility of your vehicle
will be determined by our authorized smart
center technician or the tow service pro-
vider on a case-by-case basis and may be a
factor in our ability to respond.
Additional charges may be applicable for
a breakdown location determined not to be
a reasonably accessible roadside location
as determined by our authorized techni-
cian and tow service provider.
14
>> Introduction.
For additional information refer to the
smart Roadside Assistance Program bro-
chure (USA) or the Warranty Booklet (Can-
ada) in your vehicle literature portfolio.
Change of address or ownership
In the USA: If you change your address, be
sure to send in the “Information Change
Card” found in the Warranty Information
Booklet.
In Canada: If you change your address, be
sure to send in the “Change of Address
Notice” found in the Warranty Booklet, or
simply call the Customer Service at
1-800-387-0100.
Maintaining your current address infor-
mation with smart will enable us to contact
you should important new information
about the vehicle, such as recalls, become
available.
If you sell your smart, please leave all lit-
erature with the vehicle to make it avail-
able to the next operator.
In the USA: If you bought this vehicle used,
be sure to send in the “Information Change
Card” found in the Warranty Information
Booklet.
In Canada: If you bought this vehicle used,
be sure to send in the “Notice of Pre‑Owned
Vehicle Purchase” found in the Warranty
Booklet, or call the Customer Service at
1-800-387-0100.
Operating your vehicle outside the USA
or Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in for-
eign countries, please be aware that:
R
Service facilities or replacement parts
may not be readily available.
R
Unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat-
alytic converters may not be available;
the use of leaded fuels will damage the
catalysts.
R
Gasoline may have a considerably lower
octane rating, and improper fuel can
cause engine damage.
Operating safety
G
WARNING
Work improperly carried out on electronic
components and associated software could
cause them to cease functioning. Because
the vehicle’s electronic components are
interconnected, any modifications made
may produce an undesired effect on other
systems. Electronic malfunctions could
seriously impair the operating safety of
your vehicle.
See an authorized smart center for repairs
or modifications to electronic compo-
nents.
Improper work or modifications on other
vehicle systems could also have a negative
impact on the operating safety of the vehi-
cle.
G
WARNING
Some safety systems only function while the
engine is running. You should therefore
never turn off the engine while driving.
G
WARNING
Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody
or tires/wheels, for example when running
over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
may cause serious damage and impair the
operating safety of your vehicle.
If you feel a sudden significant vibration
or ride disturbance, or you suspect that
damage to your vehicle has occurred, you
should turn on your hazard warning flash-
ers, carefully slow down, and drive with
caution to an area which is a safe distance
from the road.
>> Introduction.
15
Z
Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/
wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle
appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
authorized smart center or other qualified
maintenance or repair facility for further
inspection or repairs.
Proper use of the vehicle
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
are familiar with the following informa-
tion and rules:
R
the safety precautions in this manual
R
the “Technical data” section in this man-
ual
R
traffic rules and regulations
R
motor vehicle laws and safety standards
G
WARNING
Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle. These warning labels are intended
to make you and others aware of various
risks. You should not remove any of these
warning labels unless explicitly
instructed to do so by information on the
label itself. Removal of any of these labels
may cause you and others to be unaware of
certain risks which may result in an acci-
dent and/or personal injury.
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with
your vehicle, particularly one that you
believe may affect its safe operation, we
urge you to immediately contact an author-
ized smart center to have the problem diag-
nosed and corrected if required. Do not
drive the vehicle if you believe it may not
be safely operated. If the matter is not
handled to your satisfaction, please dis-
cuss the problem with the smart center
management, or if necessary contact us at
one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Mercedes-Benz USA LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 4C9
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only: The following text is pub-
lished as required of manufacturers under
Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations,
Part 575 pursuant to the National Traffic
and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying Mercedes-Benz USA LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA
LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov ; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA Headquarters, 1200
New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
16
>> Introduction.
Vehicle data recording
Information regarding electronic
recording devices
(Including notice pursuant to California
Code § 9951)
Please note that your vehicle is equipped
with devices that can record vehicle sys-
tems data.
This information helps, for example, to
diagnose vehicle systems after a collision
and to continuously improve vehicle
safety.
smart may access the information and share
it with others
R
for safety research or vehicle diagnosis
purposes
R
with the consent of the vehicle owner or
lessee
R
in response to an official request by law
enforcement or other government agency
R
for use in dispute resolution involving
smart, its affiliates or sales/service
organization and/or
R
as otherwise required or permitted by
law
Information on copyright
General information
Information on license for free and open-
source software used in your vehicle and
its electronic components is available on
the following website:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
opensource
>> Introduction.
17
Z
18
>> At a glance.
Cockpit ........................................... 20
Instrument cluster (miles) ...................21
Instrument cluster (kilometers) ........... 23
Steering wheel gearshift control .......... 25
Center console ..................................26
Overhead control panel ....................... 27
Door control panel .............................27
Cockpit
Function Page
:
Exterior lamp switch 64
;
Steering wheel
1
=
Instrument cluster 21
?
Steering wheel gearshift
control 84
A
Tachometer* 91
B
Cockpit clock* 92
C
Glove box 110
AUX/USB sockets* 100
D
Overhead control panel 27
E
Audio system* 98
F
Center console switches 26
G
Coin holder 110
Retractable soft top
switch
2
73
Function Page
H
Gear selector lever 81
I
Starter switch 57
J
Cup holder 107
K
Auxiliary power outlet 114
L
Storage tray* 111
M
Wiper switch 70
Cruise control switch* 100
Control lever (control
system)* 93
N
On-board Diagnostics
Socket (OBD) 213
O
Horn
P
Cruise control buttons* 100
Q
Door control panel 27
R
Inside door handle 54
1
Model pure only: The steering wheel in this vehicle varies from steering wheel illustrated.
2
cabriolet only.
20
Cockpit
>> At a glance.
* optional
Instrument cluster (miles)
Miles
Instrument cluster (U.S. vehicles)
Function Page
:
Speedometer
;
Right indicator and warn-
ing lamp display 22
=
Adjusting instrument
cluster illumination 92
Adjusting ambient light-
ing* 68
Setting digital clock 88
?
Multifunction display
86
Function Page
A
Center indicator and
warning lamp display 22
B
Selecting display for sta-
tus indicator 90
Setting digital clock 88
C
Left indicator and warn-
ing lamp display 22
Instrument cluster (miles)
21
>> At a glance.
* optional
Indicator and warning lamps
Function Page
:
M
Low‑beam head-
lamp indicator
lamp
65,
169
;
#
Left turn signal
indicator lamp
67,
169
=
÷
ESP
®
warning lamp
167
?
!
Right turn signal
indicator lamp
67,
169
A
D
EPS* warning lamp
167
B
;
Engine malfunction
indicator lamp
170
C
ò
ABS indicator lamp
163
D
$
Brake warning lamp
164
E
5
Engine oil pressure
indicator lamp
171
Function Page
F
?
Coolant tempera-
ture warning lamp
170
G
®
Fuel cap indicator
lamp
169
H
#
Battery indicator
lamp
168
I
6
SRS indicator lamp
166
J
7
Seat belt telltale
165
K
h
Combination low
tire pressure/TPMS
malfunction tell-
tale*
171
L
K
High‑beam head-
lamp indicator
lamp
67,
169
22
Instrument cluster (miles)
>> At a glance.
* optional
Instrument cluster (kilometers)
Kilometers
Instrument cluster (Canada vehicles)
Function Page
:
Speedometer
;
Right indicator and warn-
ing lamp display 24
=
Adjusting instrument
cluster illumination 92
Adjusting ambient light-
ing* 68
Setting digital clock 88
?
Multifunction display
86
Function Page
A
Center indicator and
warning lamp display 24
B
Selecting display for sta-
tus indicator 90
Setting digital clock 88
C
Left indicator and warn-
ing lamp display 24
Instrument cluster (kilometers)
23
>> At a glance.
* optional
Indicator and warning lamps
Function Page
:
M
Low‑beam head-
lamp indicator
lamp
65,
169
;
#
Left turn signal
indicator lamp
67,
169
=
÷
ESP
®
warning lamp
167
?
!
Right turn signal
indicator lamp
67,
169
A
D
EPS* warning lamp
167
B
;
Engine malfunction
indicator lamp
170
C
!
ABS indicator lamp
163
D
J
Brake warning lamp
164
E
5
Engine oil pressure
indicator lamp
171
Function Page
F
?
Coolant tempera-
ture warning lamp
170
G
®
Fuel cap indicator
lamp
169
H
#
Battery indicator
lamp
168
I
6
SRS indicator lamp
166
J
7
Seat belt telltale
165
K
h
Combination low
tire pressure/TPMS
malfunction tell-
tale*
171
L
K
High‑beam head-
lamp indicator
lamp
67,
169
24
Instrument cluster (kilometers)
>> At a glance.
* optional
Steering wheel gearshift control
Function Page
:
Multifunction display 86
;
Right shift paddle
3
:
Upshift 85
=
Left shift paddle
3
: Down-
shift 85
i
Model pure only:
The steering wheel in this vehicle varies
from steering wheel illustrated.
3
Model passion and BRABUS only.
Steering wheel gearshift control
25
>> At a glance.
Center console
Function Page
:
Tachometer* 91
;
Cockpit clock* 92
=
HVAC 102
?
Audio system* 98
A
Switching front fog
lamps* on/off 68
B
Central locking switch 54
C
Hazard warning flasher
switch 69
D
Switching tow-away pro-
tection*/interior motion
sensor* on/off 49
E
Restarting TPMS button
127
Function Page
F
Switching seat heating*
on/off, passenger side 60
G
Central unlocking switch 54
H
Switching seat heating*
on/off, driver’s side 60
I
Storage tray* 111
J
Gear selector lever 81
K
Starter switch 57
L
Parking brake lever 79
M
Coin holder 110
Retractable soft top
switch
4
73
N
Cup holder 107
4
cabriolet only.
26
Center console
>> At a glance.
* optional
Overhead control panel
Function Page
:
Passenger front air bag
off indicator lamp
41,
162
;
Switching interior light-
ing on/off 69
=
Interior rear view mirror 62
Door control panel
Function Page
:
Inside door handle 54
;
Adjusting exterior rear
view mirrors:
Manually 61
Electrically
5
61
=
Opening and closing right
side window:
Manually 76
Electrically
5
77
?
Opening and closing left
side window:
Manually 76
Electrically
5
77
5
Model passion and BRABUS only.
Door control panel
27
>> At a glance.
28
>> Safety.
Occupant safety ................................ 30
Panic alarm ..................................... 45
Driving safety systems ....................... 46
Anti-theft systems ............................ 48
Occupant safety
Introduction
The smart vehicle is equipped with seat
belts and dual stage air bags to protect you
in a crash. However, children can be killed
or seriously injured by an inflating air
bag. Indeed, there is a stronger risk of
serious death or bodily injury when an air
bag deploys on a child positioned in a
rear-facing child seat in the passenger
seat. Because this vehicle has only two
front seats and no backseat, it is limited
as are other two-seat vehicles, in the
extent to which it may restrain children
traveling in the passenger front seat. Many
states have laws against placing children
of certain ages in the front seat of a vehi-
cle that has both front and back seats. Those
laws make exceptions to permit children to
be restrained in the front seat of two seat
vehicles. Special instructions and warn-
ings are provided below about when and if
you may restrain a child in the passenger
seat of the smart vehicle. Under certain
circumstances, it is appropriate for the
passenger air bag not to operate when a
child is restrained in a car seat in the
passenger seat, and this vehicle is equip-
ped with technology to accomplish this.
Please pay very close attention to the
instructions and warnings below, particu-
larly as they relate to children.
In this section you will learn the most
important facts about the restraint system
components of the vehicle.
The restraint systems are:
R
Seat belts (Y page 31)
R
Child restraints (Y page 42)
Additional protection potential is pro-
vided by:
R
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
with
-
Air bags (Y page 33)
-
Air bag control unit (with crash sen-
sors)
-
Emergency Tensioning Devices and
seat belt force limiters (Y page 33)
R
Air bag system components with
-
Passenger front air bag off indicator
lamp (Y page 41)
-
Passenger seat with Occupant Classi-
fication System (OCS) (Y page 39)
Although independent systems, their pro-
tective functions work in conjunction with
each other.
i
For information on infants and chil-
dren traveling with you in the vehicle
and restraint systems for infants and
children, see “Children in the vehicle”
(Y page 42).
The SRS system conducts a self-test when
the ignition is switched on and in regular
intervals while the engine is running. This
facilitates detection of malfunctions. The
SRS indicator lamp 6 in the instrument
cluster comes on when the ignition is
switched on and goes out after approx-
imately four seconds.
The SRS components are in operational
readiness if the SRS indicator lamp 6
is not lit when the engine is running.
A malfunction in the system has been
detected if the SRS indicator lamp 6
R
fails to go out after approximately 4 sec-
onds after the ignition was switched on
R
does not come on at all
R
comes on after the engine was started or
while driving
G
WARNING
Modifications to or work improperly con-
ducted on restraint systems (such as seat
30
Occupant safety
>> Safety.
belts and anchors, Emergency Tensioning
Devices, seat belt force limiters or air
bags) or their wiring, as well as tampering
with interconnected electronic systems,
can lead to the restraint systems no longer
functioning as intended. Air bags or Emer-
gency Tensioning Devices, for example,
could deploy inadvertently or fail to
deploy in accidents in which they other-
wise should deploy (although the deceler-
ation threshold for air bag deployment is
exceeded). Therefore, never modify the
restraint systems. Do not tamper with elec-
tronic components or their software.
G
WARNING
In the event that the SRS indicator lamp
6 comes on while driving or does not
come on at all, the SRS self-check has
detected a malfunction. For your safety, we
strongly recommend that you immediately
but safely pull the vehicle off of the road-
way and stop driving. Contact an authorized
smart center immediately to have the sys-
tem checked; otherwise the SRS may not
deploy when needed in an accident, which
could result in serious or fatal injury, or
it might deploy unexpectedly and unneces-
sarily which could also result in injury.
In addition, improper repair work on the
SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS
inoperative or causing unintended air bag
deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore
only be performed by qualified techni-
cians. Contact an authorized smart center.
If it is necessary to modify an air bag sys-
tem to accommodate a person with disabil-
ities, contact your local authorized smart
center.
Seat belts
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in all
50 states, the District of Columbia, the U.S.
territories and all Canadian provinces and
territories.
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
occupants should have their seat belts fas-
tened whenever the vehicle is being oper-
ated.
For more information, see “Fastening the
seat belts” (Y page 62).
i
For information on infants and chil-
dren traveling with you in the vehicle
and restraint systems for infants and
children, see “Children in the vehicle”
(Y page 42).
G
WARNING
Always fasten your seat belt before driving.
Always make sure all of your passengers are
properly restrained.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and
position your seat belt greatly increases
your risk of injuries and their likely
severity in an accident. You and your
passenger should always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled.
Without your seat belt buckled, you are
much more likely to hit the interior of the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be
seriously injured or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury
or death is lessened if you are properly
wearing your seat belt. Air bags can only
protect you if you are properly wearing
your seat belt.
G
WARNING
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined posi-
tion as this can be dangerous. You could
slide under the seat belt in a collision. If
you slide under it, the belt would apply
force at the abdomen or neck, causing ser-
ious or even fatal injuries. The seat back-
rest and seat belt provide the best
restraint when the wearer is in a position
Occupant safety
31
>> Safety.
Z
that is as upright as possible and the belt
is properly positioned on the body.
G
WARNING
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Make
sure everyone riding in the vehicle is cor-
rectly restrained with a separate seat belt.
Never use a seat belt for more than one per-
son at a time.
G
WARNING
Seat belts of a vehicle involved in an acci-
dent must be inspected by smart. Only then
is it possible to determine whether the seat
belts were damaged or stressed in the acci-
dent. Damaged or stressed seat belts may
not properly protect you in a subsequent
accident.
Only use seat belts which have been
approved by smart.
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belts. This can lead to unintended activa-
tion of the Emergency Tensioning Devices
(ETDs) or to their failure to activate when
necessary.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Have all work carried out only by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized smart
center.
G
WARNING
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
R
Seat belts can only work when used prop-
erly. Never wear seat belts in any other
way than as described in this section, as
that could result in serious injuries in
case of an accident.
R
Each occupant should wear their seat belt
at all times, because seat belts help
reduce the likelihood of and potential
severity of injuries in accidents,
including rollovers. The integrated
restraint system includes SRS (driver
front air bag, passenger front air bag,
head-thorax air bags) and Emergency
Tensioning Devices (ETDs) with seat belt
force limiters.
The system is designed to enhance the
protection provided by secured seat
belts in certain frontal and side
impacts.
R
Never wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, against your neck or off your
shoulder. Doing so may cause your body to
move too far forward in a frontal crash,
which would increase the chance of head
and neck injuries. The seat belt would
also apply too much force to the ribs or
abdomen, which could severely injure
internal organs such as your liver or
spleen.
R
Never wear seat belts over rigid or
breakable objects in or on your clothing,
such as eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as
these might cause injuries.
R
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips and not across the abdomen.
If the lap seat belt is positioned across
your abdomen, it could cause serious
injuries in a crash.
R
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt
around a person and another person or
other objects at the same time.
R
Seat belts should not be worn twisted. In
a crash, you would not have the full width
of the seat belt to manage impact forces.
The twisted seat belt against your body
could cause injuries.
R
Pregnant women should also always use a
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible
on the hips to avoid any possible pres-
sure on the abdomen.
R
Never place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard or on the seat. Always
32
Occupant safety
>> Safety.
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
R
When using a seat belt to secure infant or
toddler restraints or children in booster
seats, always follow the child seat man-
ufacturer’s instructions.
Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)
and seat belt force limiters
The seat belts are equipped with Emer-
gency Tensioning Devices and seat belt
force limiters.
Emergency Tensioning Devices are
designed to activate in the following
cases:
R
in frontal or rear-end impacts exceed-
ing the system deployment threshold
R
if the restraint systems are operational
and functioning correctly
R
in collisions with high vehicle decel-
eration/acceleration in the longitudi-
nal direction, e.g. a head-on collision
R
on passenger side when the seat is occu-
pied and the seat belt is fastened
R
independently of the front air bags
When activated, Emergency Tensioning
Devices remove slack from the seat belts in
such a way that the seat belts fit more
snugly against the body. Seat belt force
limiters, when activated, reduce the force
exerted by the seat belts on occupants dur-
ing a crash.
When the emergency tensioning device is
triggered, the SRS indicator lamp 6 in
the instrument cluster illuminates, see
“SRS indicator lamp” (Y page 166).
G
WARNING
Once they have been triggered, Emergency
Tensioning Devices will no longer function
properly and must be replaced. smart rec-
ommends that you visit a qualified work-
shop to have this done. In particular, work
relevant to safety or on safety-related sys-
tems must be carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Comply with safety regulations when dis-
posing of Emergency Tensioning Devices.
These regulations are available at any
smart center.
The belt force limiter is designed to oper-
ate in unison with the front air bag, which
absorbs a portion of the seat belt’s decel-
erating forces, distributing the load over
a larger area.
In the event of a head-on or rear-end col-
lision, the emergency tensioning device is
activated if the vehicle is decelerated or
accelerated sufficiently in the longitudi-
nal direction at the start of impact with the
ignition switched on.
Air bags
Air bags can reduce the severity of inju-
ries in serious collisions, e.g. in a head-
on collision or a side impact.
G
WARNING
Air bags are designed to reduce the poten-
tial of injury in certain frontal impacts
(front air bags and knee bags), or side
impacts (head-thorax air bags, window
curtain air bags and thorax-pelvis air
bags) which may cause significant inju-
ries. However, no system available today
can completely eliminate injuries and
fatalities.
The deployment of the air bags temporarily
releases a small amount of dust from the air
bags. This dust is neither injurious to your
health, nor does it indicate a fire in the
vehicle. The dust might cause some tempo-
rary breathing difficulty for people with
asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid
this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of
the vehicle after the air bag inflates, then
get fresh air by opening a window or door.
Occupant safety
33
>> Safety.
Z
G
WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury when the front
air bags inflate, it is very important for
the driver and passenger to always be in a
properly seated position and to wear their
respective seat belt.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision always be in normal seated posi-
tion with your back against the backrest.
Fasten your seat belt and ensure it is prop-
erly positioned on your body.
Since the air bag inflates with considera-
ble speed and force, a proper seating and
hands on steering wheel position will help
to keep you at a safe distance from the air
bag.
Occupants who are unbelted, out of position
or too close to the air bag can be seriously
injured or killed by an air bag as it
inflates extremely quickly and with great
force:
R
Sit properly belted in a position that is
as upright as possible with your back
against the seat backrest.
R
Adjust the driver’s seat as far as possible
rearward, still permitting proper oper-
ation of vehicle controls. The distance
from the center of the driver’s breast-
bone to the center of the air bag cover on
the steering wheel must be at least
10 inches (25 cm) or more. You should be
able to accomplish this by adjustments to
the seat. If you have any problems, please
contact an authorized smart center.
R
Do not lean your head or chest close to the
steering wheel or dashboard.
R
Keep hands on the outside of the steering
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside
the rim can increase the risk and poten-
tial severity of hand/arm injury when the
driver’s front air bag inflates.
R
Adjust the passenger seat as far as pos-
sible rearward from the dashboard when
the seat is occupied.
R
Occupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their
heads in the area of the door where the
head-thorax air bag (cabriolet) or
thorax-pelvis side air bag (coupé)
inflates. This could result in serious
injuries or death should the head-thorax
air bag (cabriolet) or thorax-pelvis side
air bag (coupé) be deployed. Always sit
as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
properly and use an appropriately sized
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or
booster seat recommended for the size
and weight of the child.
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in severe injuries to you or other
occupants.
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that
you make the buyer aware of this safety
information. Be sure to give the buyer this
Operator’s Manual.
i
Air bags are designed to deploy only in
certain frontal impacts (front air bags
and knee bags), or side impacts (head-
thorax air bags, window curtain air bags
and thorax-pelvis air bags) which
exceed preset thresholds. Only during
these events will they provide their sup-
plemental protection.
The driver and passenger should always
wear their seat belts. Otherwise it is not
possible for air bags to provide their
supplemental protection.
In case of other types of impacts and
impacts below air bag deployment
thresholds, air bags will not deploy. The
driver and passenger will then be pro-
tected to the extent possible by a prop-
erly fastened seat belt. A properly fas-
tened seat belt is also needed to provide
the best possible protection in a roll-
over.
34
Occupant safety
>> Safety.
We caution you not to rely on the presence
of the air bags in order to avoid wearing
your seat belt.
It is important to your safety and that of
your passenger that you replace deployed
air bags and repair any malfunctioning
air bags to make sure the vehicle will
continue to provide supplemental crash
protection for occupants.
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)
and air bag
G
WARNING
R
Damaged seat belts or seat belts that have
been highly stressed in an accident must
be replaced and their anchoring points
must also be checked. Only use seat belts
installed or supplied by an authorized
smart center.
R
Air bags and Emergency Tensioning
Devices (ETDs) contain Perchlorate
material, which may require special
handling and regard for the environment.
Check with your local government’s dis-
posal guidelines. California residents,
see http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm .
R
Given the considerable deployment
speed, required inflation volume, and
the textile structure of the air bags,
there is the possibility of abrasions or
other, potentially more serious injuries
resulting from air bag deployment.
R
Air bags and Emergency Tensioning
Devices (ETDs) are designed to function
on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or
ETD that has deployed must be replaced.
R
Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
R
Do not make any modification that could
change the effectiveness of the seat
belts.
R
No modifications of any kind may be made
to any components or wiring of the SRS.
This includes changing or removing any
component or part of the SRS, the instal-
lation of additional trim material,
badges, etc. over the steering wheel hub,
passenger front air bag cover, outboard
sides of the seat backrests, and instal-
lation of additional electrical/elec-
tronic equipment on or near SRS compo-
nents and wiring. Keep area between air
bags and occupants free from objects
(e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.).
R
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protec-
tion.
R
Do not hang hangers on the coat hooks or
handles over the door. These items may
turn into projectiles and cause head and
other injuries when the head-thorax air
bag is deployed.
R
Air bag system components will be hot
after an air bag has inflated. Do not touch
them.
R
Never place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
R
In addition, improper repair work on the
SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS
inoperative or causing unintended air
bag deployment. Work on the SRS must
therefore only be performed by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized smart
center.
R
For your protection and the protection of
others, when scrapping the air bag unit
or Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs),
our safety instructions must be followed.
These instructions are available from
any authorized smart center.
How an air bag operates
An air bag is inflated in a matter of mil-
liseconds. If an air bag is triggered, the
SRS indicator lamp 6 in the instrument
cluster illuminates.
Occupant safety
35
>> Safety.
Z
!
If the air bags are activated, you will
hear a loud noise and some dust may be
generated. The explosion fundamentally
represents no risk to your hearing.
An inflated air bag slows down and reduces
the movement of the occupant. When the
occupant makes contact with a front air bag
or head-thorax air bag (cabriolet only),
hot gas flows out of the inflated front air
bags and head-thorax air bags (cabriolet
only). This reduces the load on the occu-
pant’s head and upper body. These air bags
are consequently deflated after the acci-
dent.
Driver front air bag/passenger front air
bag
The front air bags are designed to reduce
the potential of injury in certain frontal
impacts.
Driver front air bag and passenger front
air bag are deployed
R
at the start of an accident with high
vehicle deceleration in the longitudinal
direction
R
independently of other air bags in the
vehicle being deployed
R
never in the event of a rollover, unless
high vehicle deceleration in the longi-
tudinal direction is detected
i
The front air bags in this vehicle have
been designed to inflate in two stages.
This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation that are based on the
rate of relevant vehicle deceleration
and a fastened or unfastened seat belt as
assessed by the air bag control unit.
On the passenger side, the front air bag
deployment is additionally influenced
by the passenger’s weight category as
identified by the Occupant Classifica-
tion System (OCS) (Y page 39).
The lighter the passenger side occupant,
the higher the vehicle deceleration rate
required for the second stage inflation
of the air bag.
The air bags will not deploy in impacts
which do not exceed the system’s deploy-
ment thresholds. In such instances, the seat
belts are designed to protect you.
The passenger air bag will only be
deployed if
R
the system, based on OCS weight sensor
readings, senses that the passenger seat
is occupied and the 40
indicator lamp is not lit (Y page 41)
R
the impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
The driver front air bag is located in the
steering wheel housing, the passenger
front air bag above the glove box.
:
Driver front air bag
;
Passenger front air bag
Knee bags
:
Driver’s knee bag
;
Passenger knee bag
36
Occupant safety
>> Safety.
The knee bags are designed to provide
increased protection for the driver and
passenger against the risk of injuries to
the knees, thighs and lower legs. The knee
bags are located on the lower instrument
panel. They are designed to operate
together with the front air bags in certain
frontal impacts if the system determines
that air bag deployment can offer addi-
tional protection to that provided by the
seat belts. Knee bags operate best in con-
junction with a properly positioned and
fastened seat belts.
Head-thorax air bags (cabriolet only)
G
WARNING
There is a possibility for a head-thorax air
bag related injury if occupants, especially
children, are not properly seated or
restrained when next to a head-thorax air
bag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side
impact in order to do its job.
To help avoid the possibility of injury,
please follow these guidelines:
(1) Occupants, especially children,
should never place their bodies
or lean their heads in the area of
the door where the head-thorax
air bag inflates. This could
result in serious injuries or
death should the head-thorax air
bag be deployed.
(2) Always sit as upright as possi-
ble, properly use the seat belts,
and for all children 12 years old
or under, use an appropriately
sized infant restraint, toddler
restraint, or booster seat rec-
ommended for the size and
weight of the child.
(3) Always wear seat belts properly.
G
WARNING
Only use seat covers which have been tested
and approved by smart for your vehicle
model. A seat cover must have a deployment
control seam for the head-thorax air bag.
Using other seat covers may interfere with
or prevent the deployment of the head-
thorax air bags. Contact an authorized
smart center for availability.
If activated, the head-thorax air bags are
intended to provide increased protection
for the head and thorax (but not arms) of the
occupants on the side of the vehicle that is
struck.
The head-thorax air bags are deployed
R
on the side of the vehicle that is struck
(when passenger side is struck only if the
seat is occupied)
R
at the start of an accident with high
vehicle deceleration or acceleration
acting in a lateral direction, e.g. a side
impact
R
regardless of whether or not the seat belt
is in use
R
independently of the front air bags
being deployed
R
independently of the emergency tension-
ing device
The head-thorax air bags are integrated
into the driver and passenger seat backr-
ests.
:
Head-thorax air bag
Occupant safety
37
>> Safety.
Z
Window curtain air bags and thorax-pel-
vis side air bags (coupé only)
G
WARNING
There is a possibility for a thorax-pelvis
side air bag related injury if occupants,
especially children, are not properly
seated or restrained when next to a thorax-
pelvis side air bag which needs to deploy
rapidly in a side impact in order to do its
job.
To help avoid the possibility of injury,
please follow these guidelines:
(1) Occupants, especially children,
should never place their bodies
or lean their heads in the area of
the door where the thorax-pelvis
side air bag inflates. This could
result in serious injuries or
death should the thorax-pelvis
side air bag be deployed.
(2) Always sit as upright as possi-
ble, properly use the seat belts,
and for all children 12 years old
or under, use an appropriately
sized infant restraint, toddler
restraint, or booster seat rec-
ommended for the size and
weight of the child.
(3) Always wear seat belts properly.
G
WARNING
Only use seat covers which have been tested
and approved by smart for your vehicle
model. A seat cover must have a deployment
control seam for the thorax-pelvis side air
bag. Using other seat covers may interfere
with or prevent the deployment of the
thorax-pelvis side air bags. Contact an
authorized smart center for availability.
Window curtain air bags
Window curtain air bags are designed to
provide increased protection for the head,
but not the chest or arms.
Window curtain air bags are deployed
R
on the impacted side of the vehicle
R
in instances with a high rate of lateral
vehicle deceleration or acceleration
R
independently of the front air bags
R
regardless of whether the passenger seat
is occupied
R
in a rollover if the system determines
that air bag deployment can offer addi-
tional protection to that provided by the
seat belt.
The window curtain air bags are integrated
into the inner side of the roof frame. They
run above the doors from the A-pillar to the
B-pillar.
:
Window curtain air bags
Thorax-pelvis side air bags
Thorax-pelvis side air bags are designed
to provide increased protection for the
thorax and pelvis, but not the arms.
Thorax-pelvis side air bags are deployed
R
on the impacted side of the vehicle
R
in instances with a high rate of lateral
vehicle deceleration or acceleration
R
independently of the front air bags
R
regardless of whether the seat belt on the
impacted side of the vehicle is in use
R
independently of the ETDs.
Thorax-pelvis side air bags will generally
not deploy in a rollover.
38
Occupant safety
>> Safety.
The thorax-pelvis side air bags will
deploy, however, if the system detects
R
a high rate of lateral vehicle decelera-
tion or acceleration, and
R
that air bag deployment can offer addi-
tional protection to that provided by the
seat belt.
The thorax-pelvis side air bags are inte-
grated into the driver and passenger seat
backrests.
:
Thorax-pelvis side air bags
Occupant Classification System
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
automatically turns the passenger front air
bag on or off based on the classified occu-
pant weight category determined by weight
sensor readings from the passenger seat.
i Based on the classified occupant
weight category determined by weight
sensor readings from the passenger seat,
the system does also deactivate
R
head-thorax air bag (cabriolet)
R
the window curtain air bag (coupé)
R
the thorax-pelvis side air bag (coupé)
R
the seat Emergency Tensioning Devi-
ces
R
the seat belt force limiter.
Occupants must sit properly belted in a
position that is as upright as possible with
their back against the seat backrest and
feet on the floor to be correctly classified.
If the occupant’s weight is transferred to
another object in the vehicle (e.g. by lean-
ing on armrests), the OCS may not be able to
properly approximate the occupant’s
weight category.
i
If the seat, including the trim cover and
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way,
take the vehicle to an authorized smart
center. Only seat accessories approved
by smart may be used.
Both driver and the passenger should
always use the 40indicator
lamp as an indication of whether or not
the passenger is properly positioned
(Y page 41).
G
WARNING
If the 40indicator lamp illu-
minates when an adult or someone larger
than a small individual is in the passenger
seat, have the passenger re-position him-
self or herself in the seat until the
40indicator lamp goes out.
In the event of a collision, the air bag
control unit will not allow passenger front
air bag deployment when the OCS has clas-
sified the passenger seat occupant as
being up to or less than the weight of a typ-
ical 12‑month‑old child in a standard child
restraint, or if the passenger seat is
sensed as being empty.
When the OCS senses that the passenger seat
occupant is classified as being up to or
less than the weight of a typical
12‑month‑old child in a standard child
restraint, the 40indicator
lamp will illuminate when the ignition is
switched on and remain illuminated, indi-
cating that the passenger front air bag is
deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the passenger seat
is classified as being empty, the
40indicator lamp will illu-
minate and remains illuminated.
When the OCS senses that the passenger seat
occupant is classified as being heavier
Occupant safety
39
>> Safety.
Z
than the weight of a typical 12‑month‑old
child seated in a standard child restraint
or as being a small individual (such as a
young teenager or a small adult), the
40indicator lamp will illu-
minate for approximately 4 seconds when
the ignition is switched on and then,
depending on occupant weight sensor read-
ings from the seat, remains illuminated or
goes out.
When the 40indicator lamp is
illuminated, the passenger front air bag is
deactivated.
When the 40indicator lamp is
out and the passenger seat is occupied by
an adult or someone larger than a small
individual, the passenger front air bag is
activated.
When the OCS senses that the passenger seat
occupant is classified as an adult or some-
one larger than a small individual, the
40indicator lamp will illu-
minate for approximately 4 seconds when
the ignition is switched on and then goes
out, indicating that the passenger front air
bag is activated.
If the 40indicator lamp is
illuminated, the passenger front air bag is
deactivated and will not be deployed.
If the 40indicator lamp is not
illuminated, the passenger front air bag is
activated and will be deployed
R
in the event of certain frontal impacts
R
if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
R
independently of the head-thorax air
bags
If the passenger front air bag is deployed,
the rate of inflation will be influenced by
R
the rate of vehicle deceleration and a
fastened or unfastened seat belt as
assessed by the air bag control unit
R
the passenger’s weight category as iden-
tified by the OCS
G
WARNING
Children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an appro-
priate infant or child restraint recom-
mended for the size and weight of the child.
The infant or child restraint must be prop-
erly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt,
fully in accordance with the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions.
Children can be killed or seriously injured
by an inflating air bag. Note the following
important information:
R
Your vehicle is equipped with air bag
technology designed to turn off the
passenger front air bag in your vehicle
when the system senses the weight of a
typical 12‑month‑old child or less along
with the weight of a standard appropri-
ate child restraint on the passenger seat.
R
A child in a rear-facing child restraint
on the passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the passenger
front air bag inflates in a collision
which could occur under some circum-
stances, even with the air bag technology
installed in your vehicle.
R
If you install a rear-facing child
restraint on the passenger seat, make
sure the 40indicator lamp
is illuminated, indicating that the
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
Should the 40indicator
lamp not illuminate or go out while the
restraint is installed, please check
installation.
Periodically check the 40
indicator lamp while driving to make
sure the 40indicator lamp
is illuminated.
If the 40indicator lamp
goes out or remains out, do not transport
a child on the passenger seat until the
system has been repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint
on the passenger seat may be seriously
40
Occupant safety
>> Safety.
injured or even killed if the passenger
front air bag inflates.
R
If you place a child in a forward-facing
child restraint on the passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible, use
the proper child restraint recommended
for the age, size and weight of the child
by the seat manufacturer, and secure
child restraint with the vehicle’s seat
belt according to the child seat manu-
facturer’s instructions. For children
larger than the typical 12‑month‑old
child, the passenger front air bag may or
may not be activated.
i
Deployment of the driver front air bag
does not mean that the passenger front
air bag also should have deployed.
The Occupant Classification System may
have determined
R
that the seat was empty or occupied by the
weight up to or less than that of a typical
12‑month‑old child seated in a standard
child restraint — both instances where
the system suppresses deployment of the
passenger front air bag even though the
impact met the criteria and was of suf-
ficient severity to deploy the driver
front air bag
R
that the seat was occupied by a small
individual (such as a young teenager or
a small adult) or a child weighing more
than the weight of a typical 12‑month‑old
child in a standard child restraint —
instances where the system may suppress
deployment of the passenger front air
bag even though the impact met the cri-
teria and was of sufficient severity to
deploy the driver front air bag
Passenger front air bag off indicator
lamp
The indicator lamp is located on the over-
head control panel.
Passenger front air bag off indicator
lamp : illuminates when the passenger
front air bag is deactivated.
G
WARNING
When the SRS indicator lamp 6 and the
40indicator lamp are lit at
the same time, there is a malfunction in the
Occupant Classification System.
In order to ensure proper operation of the
air bag system and OCS:
R
Have the system checked as soon as pos-
sible by qualified technicians. Contact
an authorized smart center.
R
Sit properly belted in a position that is
as upright as possible with your back
against the seat backrest.
R
Do not lean on the armrests or lift your-
self from the seat by using the handle
over the door as this may cause the OCS to
be unable to correctly approximate the
occupant weight category.
R
Only have the seat repaired or replaced
by an authorized smart center.
R
Read and observe all warnings in this
chapter.
Self-test Occupant Classification Sys-
tem
After turning the key in the starter switch
to position 1 or 2, the 40indi-
cator lamp located in the center console
illuminates. If an adult occupant is prop-
erly sitting on the passenger seat and the
system senses the occupant as being an
Occupant safety
41
>> Safety.
Z
adult, the 40indicator lamp
will illuminate and go out after approx-
imately 4 seconds.
If the seat is not occupied and the system
senses the passenger seat as being empty,
the 40indicator lamp will
illuminate and not go out.
G
WARNING
If the 40indicator lamp does
not illuminate immediately after starting
the engine, the system is not functioning.
You must contact an authorized smart center
before seating any child on the passenger
seat.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (Y page 173).
G
WARNING
Never place anything between seat cushion
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it
reduces the effectiveness of the Occupant
Classification System. The bottom of the
child seat must make full contact with the
passenger seat cushion. An incorrectly
mounted child seat could cause injuries to
the child in case of an accident, instead of
increasing protection for the child.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of child seats.
Children in the vehicle
If an infant or child is traveling with you
in the vehicle:
X
Secure the child using an infant or child
restraint appropriate to the age and size
of the child.
X
Make sure the infant or child is properly
secured at all times while the vehicle is
in motion.
G
WARNING
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system. The children could
R
injure themselves on parts of the vehicle
R
be seriously or fatally injured through
excessive exposure to extreme heat or
cold
Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight. The child restraint sys-
tem’s metal parts, for example, could
become very hot, and the child could be
burned on these parts.
If children open a door, they could
R
injure other persons
R
get out of the vehicle and injure them-
selves or be injured by following traffic
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
passenger compartment unless they are
firmly secured in place.
For more information, please refer to the
“Loading and storing section”.
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo
increases a child’s risk of injury in the
event of
R
strong braking maneuvers
R
sudden changes of direction
R
an accident
Infant and child restraint system
We recommend all infants and children be
properly restrained at all times while the
vehicle is in operation.
The passenger lap-shoulder belt has a spe-
cial seat belt retractor for secure fasten-
ing of child restraints.
To fasten a child restraint, follow all
mounting instructions provided by the
child restraint manufacturer. Then pull the
shoulder seat belt out completely and let it
retract. During seat belt retraction, a
ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate
that the special seat belt retractor is acti-
42
Occupant safety
>> Safety.
vated. The seat belt is now locked. Push
down on child restraint to take up any
slack.
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
let seat belt retract completely. To deac-
tivate the special seat belt retractor for
the passenger seat, the passenger seat must
be in the most backward position. The seat
belt can again be used in the usual manner.
G
WARNING
Never release the seat belt buckle while the
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
belt retractor will be deactivated.
The use of infant or child restraints is
required by law in all 50 states, the Dis-
trict of Columbia, the U.S. territories, and
all Canadian provinces and territories.
Infants and small children should be seated
in an appropriate infant or child restraint
system properly secured in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions for
the child restraint, that complies with U.S.
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213
and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213, 213.1 and 213.2.
A statement by the child restraint manu-
facturer of compliance with these stand-
ards can be found on the instruction label
on the restraint and in the instruction
manual provided with the restraint.
When using any infant restraint, toddler
restraint, or booster seat be sure to care-
fully read and follow all manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.
Please read and observe warning labels
affixed to the inside of the vehicle and to
infant or child restraints.
G
WARNING
Children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an appro-
priately sized infant restraint, toddler
restraint, or booster seat recommended for
the size and weight of the child.
The infant or child restraint must be prop-
erly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt
fully in accordance with the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions.
Occupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their
heads in the area of the door where the
head-thorax air bags (cabriolet), window
curtain air bags (coupé) and thorax-pelvis
air bags (coupé) inflates. This could result
in serious injuries or death should the
head-thorax air bags (cabriolet), window
curtain air bags (coupé) and thorax-pelvis
air bags (coupé) be triggered. Always sit as
upright as possible, properly use the seat
belt and use an appropriately sized infant
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster
seat recommended for the size and weight
of the child.
Children can be killed or seriously injured
by an inflating air bag. Note the following
important information when circumstances
require you to place a child in the
passenger seat:
R
Your vehicle is equipped with air bag
technology designed to turn off the
passenger front air bag in your vehicle
when the Occupant Classification System
senses the weight of a typical
12‑month‑old child or less along with the
weight of an appropriate child restraint
on the passenger seat.
R
A child in a rear-facing child restraint
on the passenger seat may be seriously
injured or even killed if the passenger
front air bag inflates in a collision.
R
If you install a rear-facing child
restraint on the passenger seat, make
sure the 40indicator lamp
is illuminated, indicating that the
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
Should the 40indicator
lamp not illuminate or go out while the
restraint is installed, please check
installation. Periodically check the
40indicator lamp while
Occupant safety
43
>> Safety.
Z
driving to make sure the
40indicator lamp is illu-
minated. If the 40indica-
tor lamp goes out or remains out, do not
transport a child on the passenger seat
until the system has been repaired. A
child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the passenger seat may be seriously
injured or even killed if the passenger
front air bag inflates.
R
If you place a child in a forward-facing
child restraint on the passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible, use
a proper child restraint recommended
for the age, size and weight of the child,
and secure child restraint with the vehi-
cle’s seat belt according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. For chil-
dren larger than the typical
12‑month‑old child, the passenger front
air bag may or may not be activated.
G
WARNING
Infants and small children should never
share a seat belt with another occupant.
During an accident, they could be crushed
between the occupant and seat belt.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries
is significantly increased if the child
restraints are not properly secured in the
vehicle and/or the child is not properly
secured in the child restraint.
Children too big for a toddler restraint
must ride in a seat using regular seat belt.
Position shoulder belt across chest and
shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat
may be necessary to achieve proper seat
belt positioning for children over 41 lbs
until they reach a height where a lap-
shoulder belt fits properly without a boos-
ter.
When the child restraint is not in use,
remove it from the vehicle or secure it with
the seat belt to prevent the child restraint
from becoming a projectile in the event of
an accident.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if the children are secured in
a child restraint system. Unsupervised
children in a child restraint system may
use vehicle equipment and may cause an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
If you are using a rear-facing child
restraint system on the passenger seat, you
must verify that the passenger front air bag
is deactivated. When the passenger front
air bag is deactivated, the
40indicator lamp is illumi-
nated (Y page 41).
Top tether
Top tether permits an additional connec-
tion between a child restraint system and
the passenger seat. Proper usage of the top
tether, in accordance with instructions
provided by the child restraint manufac-
turer, can further reduce the risk of inju-
ries.
The top tether anchorage is located on the
floor of the cargo compartment. The top
tether guide for the top tether strap is
located above, on the head restraint.
44
Occupant safety
>> Safety.
X
Thread top tether strap A through top
tether guide : down the back of
passenger seat ; to top tether anchor-
age =.
X
Attach top tether hook ? to top tether
anchorage = on the floor of the cargo
compartment.
i
If you are using divider plus*, the
hooks of the top tether and the divider
plus* are attached to the same anchorage.
X
Install the child restraint system and
tighten top tether strap A according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
G
WARNING
After installing top tether straps, make
sure the seat backrests are in an upright
position and are properly locked. Push and
pull on the seat backrests to ensure they are
properly secured in the locked position. If
a seat backrest is not properly locked, the
seat backrest could fold. The child seat
would no longer be properly supported or
positioned to provide its intended bene-
fit. That could cause serious or even fatal
injuries.
Panic alarm
X
Activating: Press and hold button : for
at least 1 second.
An audible alarm and flashing exterior
lamps will operate briefly.
X
Deactivating: Press button : once more.
or
X
Insert the key in the starter switch.
i
USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The product label with FCC ID and IC cer-
tification number can be found in the
battery case.
i
Canada only:
This device complies with RSS‑210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interfer-
ence, and
2. this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
Panic alarm
45
>> Safety.
* optional
Z
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The product label with FCC ID and IC cer-
tification number can be found in the
battery case.
Driving safety systems
Introduction
G
WARNING
The following factors increase the risk of
accidents:
R
Excessive speed, especially in turns
R
Wet and slippery road surfaces
R
Following another vehicle too closely
The driving safety systems described in
this section cannot reduce these risks or
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle.
Always adapt your driving style to the pre-
vailing road and weather and traffic con-
ditions and keep a safe distance to other
road users and objects on the street.
i
In winter operation, the maximum
effectiveness of the ABS, the hydraulic
brake assistant, and the ESP
®
is only ach-
ieved with winter tires (Y page 143) or
snow chains* as required.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
G
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pump-
ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
the ABS and significantly reduces braking
effectiveness.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
the brake pressure so that the wheels do not
lock during braking. This allows you to
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will
respond even to light brake pressure.
The ABS indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster (Y page 21) comes on when you switch
on the ignition. It goes out when the engine
is running.
Braking
At the instant one of the wheels is about to
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in
the brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is
regulating the brake pressure.
X
Keep firm and steady pressure on the
brake pedal while experiencing the pul-
sation.
Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
namely braking power and the ability to
steer the vehicle.
A pulsating brake pedal can be an indica-
tion of hazardous road conditions and
functions as a reminder to take extra care
while driving.
Emergency brake maneuver
X
Keep continuous full pressure on the
brake pedal.
G
WARNING
When the ABS is malfunctioning, the
hydraulic brake assistant and the ESP
®
are
also switched off.
When the ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels
may lock during hard braking, reducing
steering capability and extending the
braking distance.
G
WARNING
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
46
Driving safety systems
>> Safety.
* optional
afforded. The ABS cannot prevent acci-
dents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplan-
ing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabil-
ities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Program (ESP
®
)
Your vehicle is equipped with the Elec-
tronic Stability Program (ESP
®
). The ESP
®
is operational as soon as the engine is
running and it monitors the vehicle’s trac-
tion (force of adhesive friction between
the tires and the road surface) and han-
dling.
The ESP
®
recognizes when a wheel is spin-
ning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By
applying brakes to the appropriate wheel
and by limiting the engine output, the
ESP
®
works to stabilize the vehicle. The
ESP
®
is especially useful while driving off
and on wet or slippery road surfaces. The
ESP
®
also stabilizes the vehicle during
braking and steering maneuvers.
The ESP
®
warning lamp ÷ in the instru-
ment cluster flashes when the ESP
®
is
engaged.
The ESP
®
warning lamp ÷ in the instru-
ment cluster comes on when you switch on
the ignition. It goes out when the engine is
running.
Depending on the driving situation, the
ESP
®
R
reduces the speed
R
selectively brakes individual wheels
R
equalizes the speed of the driven wheels
R
stabilizes the vehicle when braking
R
assists you in evasive maneuvers on all
roads
G
WARNING
If the ESP
®
warning lamp ÷ in the
instrument cluster flashes, proceed as fol-
lows:
R
While driving off, apply as little throt-
tle as possible.
R
While driving, ease up on the accelerator
pedal.
R
Adapt your speed and driving style to the
prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The ESP
®
cannot prevent accidents result-
ing from excessive speed.
G
WARNING
The ESP
®
cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase the traction afforded. The
ESP
®
cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESP
®
equip-
ped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
!
Because the ESP
®
operates automati-
cally, the engine must be turned off
(ignition switched off) when the parking
brake is being tested on a brake test
dynamometer. Active braking action
through the ESP
®
may otherwise seriously
damage the brake system which is not
covered by the smart Limited Warranty.
i
The ESP
®
will only function properly if
you use wheels of the recommended tire
size (Y page 216).
Hydraulic brake assistant
The hydraulic brake assistant operates in
emergency situations. If you apply the
Driving safety systems
47
>> Safety.
Z
brakes very quickly, the hydraulic brake
assistant automatically provides full
brake boost, thereby potentially reducing
the braking distance.
X
Apply continuous full braking pressure
until the emergency braking situation is
over.
The ABS will prevent the wheels from
locking.
When you release the brake pedal, the
brakes function again as normal. The
hydraulic brake assistant is then deacti-
vated.
G
WARNING
When the hydraulic brake assistant is mal-
functioning, the brake system is still func-
tioning normally, but without the addi-
tional brake boost that would normally be
provided during an emergency braking
maneuver. Therefore, the braking distance
may increase.
G
WARNING
The hydraulic brake assistant cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting
on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking
efficiency beyond that afforded by the con-
dition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded. The hydraulic brake
assistant cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents. The capabilities of a hydraulic
brake assistant equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dan-
gerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Activating the hazard warning flasher
after an emergency braking maneuver
If you bring the vehicle to a complete stop
by strongly braking at a speed of more than
43 mph (70 km/h), the hazard warning
flasher comes on automatically as soon as
the vehicle is at a standstill. The hazard
warning flasher will remain on until it is
switched off using the hazard warning
flasher switch (Y page 69) or until the
speed of the vehicle has exceeded 6 mph
(10 km/h).
Anti-theft systems
Electronic immobilizer
The electronic immobilizer prevents
unauthorized persons from starting your
vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle. The
engine can be started by anyone with a key
that is left inside the vehicle.
X
Activating: Remove the key from the
starter switch.
X
Deactivating: Insert the key in the
starter switch.
X
Turn the key to starter switch position 1.
Anti-theft warning system*
Once the anti-theft warning system has
been armed, a visual and audible alarm is
triggered when
R
someone opens a door or the tailgate
R
someone enters the vehicle’s interior
R
there is motion inside the vehicle
R
someone attempts to raise the vehicle
The alarm will also be triggered when
unlocking and opening the driver’s door
with the key.
i
The alarm will stay on, even if the
driver’s door is immediately closed. For
canceling the alarm, see (Y page 49).
Close the windows and the tailgate before
arming the alarm system. Make sure there
are no moving objects inside the vehicle.
48
Anti-theft systems
>> Safety.
* optional
X
Arming: Lock the vehicle using the
remote control.
Warning system indicator lamp :
flashes rapidly. The anti-theft warning
system arms after about 25 seconds. When
the anti-theft warning system is armed,
warning system indicator lamp :
flashes about every three seconds.
i
You can also arm the anti-theft warning
system by locking the vehicle without
using the remote control (Y page 176).
X
Disarming: Unlock the vehicle using the
remote control.
The anti-theft warning system is dis-
armed. Warning system indicator
lamp : stops flashing.
Canceling the alarm
X
Insert the key in the starter switch.
X
Turn the key to starter switch position 1.
or
X
Press button # or * on the key.
Tow-away alarm* and interior motion
sensor*
Once the anti-theft warning system has
been armed, a visual and audible alarm is
triggered when someone attempts to raise
the vehicle or if motion is detected inside
the vehicle.
X
Arming: Lock the vehicle using the
remote control.
The tow-away protection and the interior
motion sensor are armed after about
25 seconds.
X
Disarming: Unlock the vehicle using the
remote control.
The tow-away protection and the interior
motion sensor are disarmed.
Canceling the alarm
X
Insert the key in the starter switch.
X
Turn the key to starter switch position 1.
or
X
Press button # or * on the key.
Switching off tow-away protection and
interior motion sensor
Switch off the tow-away protection and the
interior motion sensor when locking the
vehicle and
R
transporting the vehicle,
R
board, e.g. a ferry or auto train,
R
there are people or animals in the vehi-
cle,
R
the side windows remain open.
This prevents any false alarm.
X
Remove the key from the starter switch.
X
Press switch : within 60 seconds.
Indicator lamp ; comes on.
Anti-theft systems
49
>> Safety.
* optional
Z
X
Exit the vehicle.
X
Lock the vehicle using the remote
control.
i
The tow-away protection and the inter-
ior motion sensor remain switched off
until you lock your vehicle again.
50
Anti-theft systems
>> Safety.
>> Controls.
Opening and closing .......................... 52
Starter switch positions ..................... 57
Seats .............................................. 58
Mirrors ........................................... 61
Seat belts ........................................ 62
Lighting ......................................... 64
Windshield wipers ............................ 70
Soft top system (cabriolet only) ............ 71
Side windows .................................... 76
Driving and parking .......................... 77
Transmission ................................... 81
Instrument cluster ............................. 86
Control system* ................................ 92
Audio system* .................................. 98
Driving systems ............................... 100
HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, Air Con-
ditioning) ...................................... 102
Loading and storing ......................... 107
Useful features ................................ 113
Opening and closing
Key
Key with remote control
:
* Lock button
;
$ Opening the retractable soft top
6
/
unlocking the upper tailgate
7
=
# Unlock button
The remote control centrally locks and
unlocks:
R
the driver’s door
R
the fuel filler flap
R
the passenger door
R
the upper tailgate
G
WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch, take it with
you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave chil-
dren unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possi-
ble for children to open a locked door from
the inside, which could result in an acci-
dent and/or serious personal injury.
!
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
exposing the remote control to high lev-
els of electromagnetic radiation.
!
If you can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle with the remote control, the bat-
teries in the remote control are dis-
charged, or the remote control is mal-
functioning.
R
Check the batteries in the remote
control and replace them if necessary.
R
If you do not have a spare transmitter
battery at hand, use the key to open the
driver’s door and the fuel filler flap.
If the remote control is malfunctioning,
contact an authorized smart center.
i
USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The product label with FCC ID and IC cer-
tification number can be found in the
battery case.
i
Canada only:
This device complies with RSS‑210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interfer-
ence, and
2. this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The product label with FCC ID and IC cer-
tification number can be found in the
battery case.
6
cabriolet only.
7
coupé only.
52
Opening and closing
>> Controls.
!
The remote control has an operating
range of approximately 50 ft (15 meters).
This can fluctuate greatly as a conse-
quence of local conditions (reflective or
absorbing objects) and interference
emitted by other radio transmission sys-
tems. Similarly, the operating range
fluctuates in line with the direction
from which the remote control is acti-
vated.
To prevent theft, however, it is advisable
to only unlock the vehicle when you are
in close proximity to it.
Locking and unlocking from the out-
side
X
Selective unlocking: Press button # on
the key once.
All turn signal lamps flash once.
The anti-theft warning system* is dis-
armed.
The driver’s door and the fuel filler flap
are unlocked.
X
Global unlocking: Press button # on the
key twice.
All turn signal lamps flash once again.
The passenger door and the tailgate are
unlocked in addition to the driver’s door
and the fuel filler flap.
X
Global locking: Press button * on the
key.
With the doors, the tailgate(s), and the
fuel filler flap closed, the turn signal
lamps flash three times.
The anti-theft warning system* is armed.
The indicator lamp on the central lock-
ing switch flashes (Y page 54).
The interior and exterior
8
lamps come on
and then go out again after 12 seconds.
i
In vehicles with anti-theft warning
system*, an acoustic signal will sound
when locking or unlocking the vehicle.
When unlocking, the acoustic signal
sounds once. When locking, the acoustic
signal sounds three times.
The acoustic signal is activated at the
factory. If you wish to deactivate the
feature, contact an authorized smart
center.
Automatic locking
Auto-relock function
The vehicle will lock again automatically
within approximately 60 seconds of
unlocking with the key if neither the
driver’s nor passenger door is opened.
!
To prevent an inadvertent lockout,
never leave your key lying in the vehicle.
Drive lock function
The vehicle locks automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are
turning at vehicle speeds of approximately
8 mph (14 km/h) or more. The drive lock
function is enabled at the factory.
X
Switching on: Switch off the ignition.
X
Press the central locking switch
(Y page 54) and button * on the key
simultaneously.
An acoustic signal sounds.
The drive lock function is switched on.
X
Switching off: Switch off the ignition.
X
Press the central unlocking switch
(Y page 54) and button # on the key
simultaneously.
An acoustic signal sounds.
The drive lock function is switched off.
8
Vehicles with rain-light sensor* only.
Opening and closing
53
>> Controls.
* optional
Z
Locking and unlocking from the inside
G
WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch, take it with
you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave chil-
dren unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
unsupervised access to a vehicle could
result in an accident and/or serious per-
sonal injury.
You can lock and unlock the vehicle from
inside using the central locking or unlock-
ing switch. This can be useful, for example,
if you want to unlock the passenger door
from inside or lock the vehicle before
starting to drive.
X
Locking: Press central locking
switch :.
The indicator lamp on central locking
switch : comes on, when the starter
switch is in position 1.
The indicator lamp on central locking
switch : flashes, when the starter
switch is in position 0.
With the doors and the tailgate closed,
the vehicle locks.
X
Unlocking: Press central unlocking
switch ;.
The vehicle unlocks and the indicator
lamp on central locking switch : goes
out.
Opening the doors from the inside
You can open a locked door from the inside.
Open door only when conditions are safe to
do so.
X
Pull on inside door handle :.
With the driver’s door open a warning
signal sounds if the exterior lamps are
switched on and the ignition is switched
off.
Opening the upper tailgate on the
coupé
G
WARNING
Make sure the tailgate is closed when the
engine is running and while driving.
Among other dangers, deadly carbon mon-
oxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior
resulting in unconsciousness and death.
54
Opening and closing
>> Controls.
X
Press button # on the key twice.
X
Press and hold button $ on the key for
approximately two seconds.
or
X
Pull the release handle in handle
recess : of the lower tailgate.
The upper tailgate is unlocked.
X
Swivel the upper tailgate upwards to
open.
Observe the information on loading the
vehicle (Y page 112).
For information on vehicle weights, see
“Vehicle specification” (Y page 215).
Opening the lower tailgate on the
coupé
G
WARNING
High outside temperature, stop-and-go
traffic, driving on long uphill grades, or
driving at high engine speed may increase
the temperature in the engine compart-
ment. Therefore the area around the air
slots in the rear apron may be hot. Let the
engine cool off before touching this area
to prevent burns.
X
Open the upper tailgate (Y page 54).
X
Pull either of the release levers : back-
wards.
The lower tailgate is unlocked.
X
Swivel the lower tailgate downwards to
open.
The lower tailgate is held in the hori-
zontal position by means of the two
retaining straps.
!
When folded down, the lower tailgate
can bear loads up to maximum of 220 lbs
(100 kg).
Observe the information on loading the
vehicle (Y page 112).
For information on vehicle weights, see
“Vehicle specification” (Y page 215).
Closing the tailgate(s) on the coupé
G
WARNING
To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from the
cargo compartment opening when closing
the tailgate(s). Be especially careful when
small children are around.
X
Swivel the lower tailgate upwards to
close. Allow the two release levers to
engage audibly.
X
Swivel the upper tailgate downwards to
close.
G
WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch, take it with
Opening and closing
55
>> Controls.
Z
you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave chil-
dren unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
unsupervised access to a vehicle could
result in an accident and/or serious per-
sonal injury.
Opening and closing the retractable
soft top (cabriolet only)
You can fully open the retractable soft top
with the key.
Key with remote control
:
* Lock button
;
$ Opening the retractable soft top
=
# Unlock button
X
Opening: Press button $ on the key for
approximately two seconds.
The retractable soft top opens.
i
Pressing symbols #, * or $ on the
key with remote control while opening
the retractable soft top will interrupt
the opening procedure.
X
Closing: Press symbol G on the
retractable soft top switch (Y page 56).
G
WARNING
When closing the retractable soft top, make
sure there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the closing procedure.
i
The remote control has an operating
range of approximately 50 ft (15 meters).
Take care that you do not open your vehi-
cle’s retractable soft top inadvertently.
Opening the tailgate on the cabriolet
G
WARNING
Make sure the tailgate is closed when the
engine is running and while driving.
Among other dangers, deadly carbon mon-
oxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior
resulting in unconsciousness and death.
G
WARNING
High outside temperature, stop-and-go
traffic, driving on long uphill grades, or
driving at high engine speed may increase
the temperature in the engine compart-
ment. Therefore the area around the air
slots in the rear apron may be hot. Let the
engine cool off before touching this area
to prevent burns.
X
Press button # on the key twice.
X
Pull the release handle in handle
recess : of the tailgate.
The tailgate is unlocked.
X
Swivel the tailgate downwards to open.
Opening and closing the rear soft top
(cabriolet only)
You can open the rear soft top to ease load-
ing and unloading.
56
Opening and closing
>> Controls.
X
Opening: Push release levers :, located
to the left and right of the retaining
clip, upwards.
X
Swivel the rear soft top upwards to open.
G
WARNING
To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from the
cargo compartment opening when closing
the rear soft top. Be especially careful
when small children are around.
X
Closing: Swivel the rear soft top down-
wards to close.
X
Pull soft top down.
X
Pull release levers :, located to the left
and right of the retaining clip, down-
wards.
X
Make sure the rear soft top is correctly
locked in place on both sides.
Closing the tailgate on the cabriolet
G
WARNING
To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from the
cargo compartment opening when closing
the tailgate. Be especially careful when
small children are around.
!
When closing the tailgate, you must
first close the rear soft top. Otherwise
you might break the release levers of the
rear soft top.
X
Swivel the tailgate upwards to close. Let
the tailgate lock into place.
G
WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch, take it with
you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave chil-
dren unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
unsupervised access to a vehicle could
result in an accident and/or serious per-
sonal injury.
Starter switch positions
Starter switch
Starter switch positions
57
>> Controls.
Z
g
For removing key
1
Ignition (power supply for all elec-
trical consumers) and driving posi-
tion
All lamps (except low‑beam head-
lamp indicator lamp, high‑beam
headlamp indicator lamp, and turn
signal indicator lamps unless acti-
vated) in the instrument cluster
come on. If a lamp in the instrument
cluster fails to come on when the
ignition is switched on, have it
checked and replaced if necessary.
If a lamp in the instrument cluster
remains on after starting the
engine or comes on while driving,
refer to “Warning and indicator
lamps in the instrument cluster”
(Y page 162).
2
Starting (Y page 77)
i
When you switch on the ignition, the
indicator and warning lamps (except
low‑beam headlamp indicator lamp,
high‑beam headlamp indicator lamp, and
turn signal indicator lamps unless acti-
vated) in the instrument cluster come on.
The indicator and warning lamps (except
low‑beam headlamp indicator lamp,
high‑beam headlamp indicator lamp, and
turn signal indicator lamps if activated)
will go out when the engine is running.
This indicates that the respective sys-
tems are operational.
Seats
Safety notes
G
WARNING
All seat adjustments, as well as fastening
of seat belts, must be done before the vehi-
cle is operated.
G
WARNING
When adjusting the seat, make sure no one
becomes trapped.
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driv-
ing. Adjusting the seat while driving could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehi-
cle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined posi-
tion as this can be dangerous. You could
slide under the seat belt in a collision. If
you slide under the seat belt, it could apply
force at the abdomen or neck, potentially
causing serious or fatal injuries. The seat
backrest and seat belts provide the best
restraint when the wearer is in a position
that is as upright as possible and seat belts
are properly positioned on the body.
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten your seat belt.
Observe the following points:
R
Adjust the seat backrest until your arms
are slightly angled when holding the
steering wheel.
R
Adjust the seat to a comfortable seating
position that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The
position should be as far back as possi-
ble with the driver still able to operate
the controls properly.
R
Never place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being
adjusted.
Failure to do so could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Observe the notes on the air bag system.
G
WARNING
Children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an appro-
priately sized infant restraint, toddler
restraint, or booster seat recommended for
the size and weight of the child. For addi-
tional information, see “Children in the
vehicle”.
58
Seats
>> Controls.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries
is significantly increased if the child
restraints are not properly secured in the
vehicle and/or the child is not properly
secured in the child restraint.
G
WARNING
Contact an authorized smart center if the
seats have become damaged.
The seat is an integral part of the vehicle’s
safety system in the same way as seat belts
and air bags. Damage to the seats may
reduce their ability to protect the occu-
pants in an accident.
Seat adjustment
:
Seat backrest tilt
;
Seat fore and aft adjustment
Seat backrest tilt
X
Adjusting: Sit down on the front seat.
X
Pull adjustment lever : upwards and
adjust the seat backrest until your arms
are slightly angled when holding the
steering wheel.
X
Release adjustment lever : when the
desired seat backrest tilt is reached.
When you hear an audible click, the seat
backrest is again fixed into place.
X
Check for proper engagement before
driving.
i
When adjusting the tilt of the backrest
without any load on the seat then hold on
to the backrest with one hand.
Seat fore and aft adjustment
X
Pull adjustment handle ; upwards and
slide the seat to a seating position that
still allows you to reach the accelerator/
brake pedal safely.
X
Release adjustment handle ; when the
desired seating position is reached.
When you hear an audible click, the seat
is again fixed into place.
X
Check for proper engagement before
driving.
Seat height
The seat guide is inclined in the horizon-
tal plane. Seat fore and aft adjustment also
alters the seat height.
Armrest* on driver’s seat
Folding up and down
X
Folding up: Hold front of armrest and fold
it up in direction of arrow :.
X
Folding down: Hold front of armrest and
fold it down in direction of arrow ;.
Adjusting armrest angle
You can adjust the angle of the armrest when
it is folded down.
X
Turn thumb wheel =.
Seats
59
>> Controls.
* optional
Z
R
Direction of arrow ?: down
R
Direction of arrow A: up
Passenger seat
You can expand the cargo compartment by
folding down the passenger seat.
Observe the loading instructions
(Y page 112).
Folding down
X
Remove the seat belt from seat belt
guide :.
X
Move the passenger seat backward as far
as it will go.
X
Hold the backrest with one hand back.
X
Pull adjustment lever ; upwards and
unlock the seat backrest.
X
Fold the seat backrest forward.
Folding back
X
Pull adjustment lever ; upwards and
unlock the seat backrest.
X
Fold the seat backrest backward.
When you hear an audible click, the seat
backrest is again fixed into place.
X
Check for proper engagement before
driving.
X
Place the seat belt back in seat belt
guide :.
G
WARNING
When folding the passenger seat backrest
back to its upright position, please make
sure
R
nobody becomes trapped
R
no obstacles are jammed in the lock
R
the adjustment lever has audibly locked
into position
A properly engaged passenger seat back-
rest will help to prevent stored objects in
the cargo compartment from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants dur-
ing
R
braking
R
vehicle maneuvers
R
an accident
Seat heating*
The seat heating allows you to heat the
driver’s and passenger seat electrically.
The seat heating has two levels.
60
Seats
>> Controls.
* optional
The indicator lamps on seat heating
switch : come on to show which heating
level you have selected.
Level Indicator lamps on the switch
off
No indicator lamp on
1
One indicator lamp on
2
Two indicator lamps on
X
Make sure the key is in starter switch
position 1.
X
Switching on: Press seat heating
switch : repeatedly until the desired
seat heating level is reached.
X
Switching off: Press seat heating
switch : repeatedly until all indicator
lamps go out.
!
If the seat heating is malfunctioning,
the indicator lamp(s) on the switch
come(s) on briefly when you press the
switch and then go(es) out again. Contact
an authorized smart center.
Mirrors
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a
good view of the road and traffic condi-
tions.
Exterior rear view mirrors
G
WARNING
Exercise care when using the passenger-
side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your
interior rear view mirror and glance over
your shoulder to determine whether any
vehicles are in the ’blind spot’ of your field
of vision, before changing lanes.
Manually adjustable exterior rear view
mirrors
X
Adjusting: Move adjustment lever : up,
down, left, or right to the desired set-
ting.
Power exterior rear view mirrors
This feature is only available on the model
passion and BRABUS.
The operating control is on the door
control panel.
X
Make sure the key is in starter switch
position 1.
X
Selecting the mirror: Turn knob : to the
left for the driver’s side exterior rear
view mirror or to the right for the
passenger side exterior rear view mir-
ror.
X
Adjusting the mirror: Move adjustment
button ; up, down, left, or right to the
desired setting.
Mirrors
61
>> Controls.
Z
Exterior rear view mirror heating
This feature is only available on the model
passion and BRABUS and in conjunction
with power exterior rear view mirrors.
After switching on the rear window
defroster, the exterior rear view mirrors
will be heated automatically. This pre-
vents icing up the exterior rear view mir-
rors and also creates a clear view when the
exterior rear view mirrors have fogged up.
If the rear window defroster is automati-
cally deactivated after approximately
10 minutes of operation, the exterior rear
view mirror heating also deactivates.
X
Make sure the key is in starter switch
position 1.
X
Switching on: Switch on the rear window
defroster (Y page 106).
The exterior rear view mirror heating is
switched on.
X
Switching off: Switch off the rear window
defroster (Y page 106).
The exterior rear view mirror heating is
switched off.
i
The exterior rear view mirror heating
also switches off if the key is turned to
starter switch position 0.
Interior rear view mirror
X
Adjusting the mirror: Manually move the
interior rear view mirror up, down, left,
or right to the desired setting.
X
Selecting the antiglare position: Tilt
the interior rear view mirror to the
antiglare position by moving lever :
forward or backward.
Seat belts
Fastening the seat belts
G
WARNING
Always fasten your seat belt before driving.
Always make sure all of your passengers are
properly restrained.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and
position your seat belt greatly increases
your risk of injuries and their likely
severity in an accident. You and your
passenger should always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled.
Without your seat belt buckled, you are
much more likely to hit the interior of the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be
seriously injured or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury
or death is lessened if you are properly
wearing your seat belt. Air bags can only
protect you if you are properly wearing
your seat belt.
G
WARNING
Children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an appro-
priately sized infant restraint, toddler
restraint, or booster seat recommended for
the size and weight of the child. For addi-
tional information, see “Children in the
vehicle”.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries
is significantly increased if the child
restraints are not properly secured in the
62
Seat belts
>> Controls.
vehicle and/or the child is not properly
secured in the child restraint.
G
WARNING
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Make
sure everyone riding in the vehicle is cor-
rectly restrained with a separate seat belt.
Never use a seat belt for more than one per-
son at a time.
G
WARNING
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined posi-
tion as this can be dangerous. You could
slide under the seat belt in a collision. If
you slide under it, the belt would apply
force at the abdomen or neck, causing ser-
ious or even fatal injuries. The seat back-
rest and seat belt provide the best
restraint when the wearer is in a position
that is as upright as possible and the belt
is properly positioned on the body.
G
WARNING
Observe ”Safety notes“ (Y page 35).
:
Seat belt outlet
;
Seat belt guide
=
Latch plate
?
Seat belt buckle
A
Release button
X
Fastening the seat belt: With a smooth
motion, pull the seat belt out of seat belt
outlet :.
X
Place the shoulder portion of the seat
belt across the top of your shoulder and
the lap portion across your hips.
X
Push latch plate = into seat belt
buckle ? until it clicks.
X
If necessary, tighten the lap portion of
the seat belt to a snug fit by pulling
shoulder portion up.
X
Unfastening the seat belt: Press release
button A.
X
Allow the retractor to completely rewind
the seat belt by guiding latch plate =.
Proper use of seat belts
R
Do not twist the seat belt when fastening.
R
Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder
portion is located as close as possible
to the middle of the shoulder (it should
Seat belts
63
>> Controls.
Z
not touch the neck). Never pass the
shoulder portion of the seat belt under
your arm.
R
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
across the abdomen.
R
Place the seat backrest in a position that
is as upright as possible.
R
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time.
R
Do not fasten a seat belt around a person
and another object at the same time. When
using a seat belt to secure infant or tod-
dler restraints or children in booster
seats, always follow the child seat man-
ufacturer’s instructions.
R
Check your seat belt during travel to
make sure it is properly positioned.
R
Make sure the seat belt is always fitted
snugly. Take special care to maintain a
snug fit when wearing loose clothing.
G
WARNING
Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in
the door or in the seat adjustment mecha-
nism. This could damage the seat belt.
Never attempt to make modifications to
seat belts. This could impair the effec-
tiveness of the seat belts.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Damaged seat belts or seat belts that were
highly stressed in an accident must be
replaced. Contact an authorized smart
center.
Correct driver seat adjustment
G
WARNING
Observe ”Safety notes“ (Y page 58).
X
Adjust the driver’s seat properly
(Y page 59).
Make sure that you
R
are positioned as far away from the
driver’s front air bag as possible
R
can reach steering wheel : with your
arms slightly bent at the elbows
R
can fasten seat belt ; properly
R
you have adjusted seat backrest = to
a position that is as upright as possi-
ble
R
you can move your legs freely
R
you can depress the brake and accel-
erator pedal safely.
X
Make sure the seat belt is fastened prop-
erly (Y page 62).
Lighting
Exterior lamp switch
For safety, smart recommends that you
drive with your low‑beam headlamps on
during the day. In certain countries, local
laws dictate that low‑beam headlamps are
switched on automatically during opera-
tion of the vehicle.
64
Lighting
>> Controls.
i
If you drive in countries where vehi-
cles drive on the other side of the road
than the country in which the vehicle is
registered, you must have the headlamps
modified for symmetrical low beams.
Relevant information can be obtained at
any authorized smart center.
Exterior lamp switch
$
Lamps off
Daytime running lamp mode*
T
Parking lamps
L
Low‑beam headlamps or high‑beam
headlamps
Ã
Automatic headlamp mode*
Parking lamps
You can switch on and off the parking lamps
with the exterior lamp switch using the
manual headlamp mode.
X
Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp
switch to position T.
The parking lamps come on.
The following lamps also come on:
R
Tail lamps
R
License plate lamps
R
Side marker lamps
Low‑beam headlamps
You can switch on and off the low‑beam
headlamps with the exterior lamp switch
using the manual headlamp mode.
X
Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp
switch to position L.
The low‑beam headlamps come on.
The low‑beam headlamp indicator lamp
M in the instrument cluster comes on.
The following lamps also come on:
R
Tail and parking lamps
R
License plate lamps
R
Side marker lamps
Automatic headlamp mode*
This feature is only available on vehicles
with rain-light sensor*.
The following lamps come on and go out
automatically depending on the brightness
of the ambient light:
R
Low‑beam headlamps
R
Tail and parking lamps
R
License plate lamps
R
Side marker lamps
G
WARNING
If the exterior lamp switch is set to posi-
tion Ã, the headlamps will not be auto-
matically switched on under foggy condi-
tions.
To minimize risk to you and to others, acti-
vate headlamps by turning exterior lamp
switch to position L when driving or
when traffic and/or ambient lighting con-
ditions require you to do so.
In low ambient lighting conditions, only
switch from position à to L with the
vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Switching from position à to L will
briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so
while driving in low ambient lighting con-
ditions may result in an accident.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid to the driver. The driver is responsible
for the operation of the vehicle’s lights at
all times.
Lighting
65
>> Controls.
* optional
Z
X
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
Ã.
With the key in starter switch position
1, the tail and parking lamps, the license
plate lamps, and the side marker lamps
will come on and go out automatically
depending on the brightness of the ambi-
ent light.
With the engine running, the low‑beam
headlamps, the tail and parking lamps,
the license plate lamps and the side
marker lamps will come on and go out
automatically depending on the bright-
ness of the ambient light.
Daytime running lamp mode*
In USA, the daytime running lamp mode can
be deactivated.
In Canada, the daytime running lamp mode
is mandatory and therefore in a constant
mode.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, your
vehicle comes either with low-beam day-
time running lamps or with LED daytime
running lamps.
Switching on:
X
Start the engine.
The daytime running lamps are switched
on.
On vehicles with low beam daytime run-
ning lamps the parking lamps also come
on.
Switching off - vehicles without rain-
light sensor*:
X
Switch on the parking lamps T or the
low‑beam headlamps M.
The daytime running lamps are switched
off.
Switching off - vehicles with rain-light
sensor*:
X
Switch on the parking lamps T or the
low‑beam headlamps M.
The daytime running lamps are switched
off.
or
X
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
Ã.
With the engine running, the low‑beam
headlamps, the tail and parking lamps,
the license plate lamps and the side
marker lamps will come on and go out
automatically depending on the bright-
ness of the ambient light.
Deactivating (USA only):
X
Switch off the ignition.
X
Remove the key from the starter switch.
X
Switch on the high-beam flasher and
press button # on the key simultane-
ously.
An acoustic signal sounds.
The daytime running lamp mode is deac-
tivated.
Reactivating (USA only):
X
Switch off the ignition.
X
Remove the key from the starter switch.
X
Switch on the high-beam flasher and
press button # on the key simultane-
ously.
An acoustic signal sounds.
The daytime running lamp mode is reac-
tivated.
Combination switch (high beam, high
beam flasher and turn signals)
X
Make sure the key is in starter switch
position 1.
66
Lighting
>> Controls.
* optional
High‑beam headlamps and high-beam
flasher
X
Make sure the low‑beam headlamps are
switched on (Y page 65).
X
Switching on: Push the combination
switch to position 1.
The high‑beam headlamps come on.
The high‑beam headlamp indicator lamp
K in the instrument cluster comes on.
X
Switching off: Pull the combination
switch in direction of arrow ; to its
original position.
The high‑beam headlamps go out.
The high‑beam headlamp indicator lamp
K in the instrument cluster goes out.
X
High-beam flasher: Pull the combination
switch briefly in direction of arrow ;.
Turn signals
:
Turn signals, right
;
Turn signals, left
X
Switching on: Push the combination
switch in direction of arrow : or ;.
The corresponding turn signals flash.
The corresponding turn signal indicator
lamp # or ! in the instrument
cluster flashes.
The combination switch resets automat-
ically after major steering wheel move-
ment.
i
To signal minor directional changes
such as changing lanes, push the combi-
nation switch only to the point of resist-
ance and release. The corresponding turn
signals will flash three times.
Coming home function
Vehicles without rain-light sensor: The
interior lamps come on and then go out
again after 12 seconds every time when you
lock or unlock the vehicle.
Vehicles with rain-light sensor*: In addi-
tion to the interior lamps, the exterior
lamps come on and then go out again after
12 seconds depending on the brightness of
the ambient light when you lock or unlock
the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle
X
Remove the key from the starter switch.
X
Exit the vehicle.
X
Press button * on the key.
The vehicle is locked.
The interior and exterior
9
lamps come on
and then go out again after 12 seconds.
When returning to the vehicle
X
Press button # on the key either once or
twice.
The vehicle is either selectively or
globally unlocked.
9
Vehicles with rain-light sensor*.
Lighting
67
>> Controls.
* optional
Z
The interior and exterior
9
lamps come on
and then go out again after 12 seconds.
Ambient lighting*
The ambient lighting illuminates the
vehicle interior with 6 LEDs when the low-
beam headlamps are switched on. The LEDs
can be dimmed.
The LEDS are located
R
in the overhead control panel
R
in the door pockets, driver’s and
passenger side
R
in the storage trays to the left and right
of the steering wheel
In addition to the ambient lighting, the
footwells on the driver’s and passenger
side are also illuminated by separate
lamps.
i
When you open a door, the interior
lighting comes on and the brightness of
lamps in the footwells increases.
X
Make sure the key is in starter switch
position 1.
X
Switch on the parking lamps.
X
To brighten or dim ambient lighting:
Press button : on the instrument cluster
repeatedly until the desired setting is
reached.
The current setting is stored.
i
When adjusting the ambient lighting,
the illumination level for instrument
cluster is also changed (Y page 92).
Front fog lamps
G
WARNING
Vehicles with rain-light sensor*:
In low ambient lighting or foggy condi-
tions, only switch from position à to
L with the vehicle at a standstill in a
safe location. Switching from à to
L will briefly switch off the headlamps.
Doing so while driving in low ambient
lighting conditions may result in an acci-
dent.
i
Fog lamps will operate with the parking
lamps and/or the low‑beam headlamps on.
Fog lamps should only be used in con-
junction with low‑beam headlamps. Con-
sult your State or Province Motor Vehicle
Regulations regarding permissible
lamp operation.
i
Vehicle with rain-light sensor*:
Fog lamps cannot be switched on manually
with the exterior lamp switch in posi-
tion Ã. To switch on the fog lamps,
turn the exterior lamp switch to position
L first.
9
Vehicles with rain-light sensor*.
68
Lighting
>> Controls.
* optional
X
Make sure the parking lamps or the
low‑beam headlamps are switched on.
X
Switching on: Press switch :.
The front fog lamps come on.
The indicator lamp in the switch comes
on.
X
Switching off: Press switch : once
more.
The front fog lamps go out.
The indicator lamp in the switch goes
out.
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher can be switched
on at all times, even with the key removed
from the starter switch.
X
Switching on: Press hazard warning
flasher switch :.
All turn signal lamps are flashing.
X
Switching off: Press hazard warning
flasher switch : once more.
Interior lighting
The interior lamp comes on for a period of
time when you open the doors, or lock or
unlock the vehicle with the key.
It goes out
R
immediately after switching off the
ignition with all doors closed
R
after 30 seconds if the doors are not
opened
R
after 15 seconds if all doors are closed
R
after 10 minutes if at least one door is
open
The rocker switch can be set to three dif-
ferent positions.
:
Interior lamp
;
Off
=
Switching on the automatic control
?
Continuous operation
Automatic control
X
Set the rocker switch to position =.
The interior lamp comes on for a period
of time.
Switching off
X
Set the rocker switch to position ;.
The interior lamp is permanently
switched off.
Continuous operation
X
Set the rocker switch to position ?.
The interior lamp is permanently
switched on.
!
When leaving the vehicle, make sure the
interior lamp is not set to continuous
operation and none of the doors is left
open for a long period of time.
Doing otherwise could result in a dis-
charged battery.
Lighting
69
>> Controls.
Z
Windshield wipers
Switching windshield wipers on and off
Example illustration coupé
X
Make sure the key is in starter switch
position 1.
X
Switching on: Turn the wiper switch to
position 2 or 3, depending on the
intensity of the rain.
!
Do not operate the windshield wipers
when the windshield is dry. Dust that
accumulates on a windshield might
scratch the glass and/or damage the
wiper blades when wiping occurs on a dry
windshield. If it is necessary to operate
the windshield wipers in dry weather
conditions, always operate the wind-
shield wipers with windshield washer
fluid.
!
If anything blocks the windshield wip-
ers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off
immediately.
For safety reasons, stop the vehicle in a
safe location and
R
-
remove the key from the starter
switch
-
engage the parking brake
before attempting to remove any
blockage.
R
Remove blockage.
R
Turn the windshield wipers on again.
X
Switching off: Turn the wiper switch to
position g.
Intermittent wiping
Only switch on intermittent wiping under
wet weather conditions or in the presence
of precipitation.
Vehicles with rain-light sensor*: When you
select intermittent wiping, the sensor is
activated. The sensor automatically sets a
suitable wiping interval depending on the
wetness of the sensor surface.
!
Vehicles with rain-light sensor*:
Do not leave windshield wipers in inter-
mittent setting when the vehicle is taken
to an automatic car wash or during wind-
shield cleaning. Windshield wipers will
operate in the presence of water sprayed
on the windshield, and windshield wip-
ers may be damaged as a result.
!
Vehicles with rain-light sensor*:
If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt
on the surface of the sensor or optical
effects may cause the windshield wipers
to wipe in an undesired fashion. This
could then damage the windshield wiper
blades or scratch the windshield. You
should therefore switch off the wind-
shield wipers when weather conditions
are dry.
X
Make sure the key is in starter switch
position 1.
X
Activating intermittent wiping: Turn the
wiper switch to position 1.
After the initial wipe, pauses between
wipes are automatically controlled
depending on the vehicle speed and by the
rain-light sensor*.
X
Deactivating intermittent wiping: Turn
the wiper switch to position g.
70
Windshield wipers
>> Controls.
* optional
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
Example illustration coupé
X
Pull the wiper switch in direction of
arrow : and hold it in position.
The windshield wipers operate with
windshield washer fluid.
X
Release the wiper switch.
The windshield wipers will wipe three
more times.
i
To prevent smears on the windshield, or
noisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe
with windshield washer fluid periodi-
cally even when it is raining.
Single wipe
X
Pull the wiper switch briefly in direc-
tion of arrow :.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
with windshield washer fluid.
Rear window wiper/washer (coupé only)
X
Make sure the key is in starter switch
position 1.
X
Activating intermittent wiping: Push the
wiper switch to position 1.
X
Wiping with windshield washer fluid:
Push the wiper switch in direction of
arrow ; and hold in position until the
rear window is clean.
X
Release the wiper switch.
The rear window wiper will wipe three
more times.
Intermittent wiping is still activated.
X
Deactivating intermittent wiping: Pull
the wiper switch back to start position.
i
The rear window wiper wipes one time
when reverse gear R is engaged with the
windshield wipers switched on.
Soft top system (cabriolet only)
Introduction
The soft top system of the smart cabriolet
consists of a
R
retractable soft top
R
rear soft top
R
side rails
You can remove the side rails over the doors
when you open the retractable soft top and
open the rear soft top.
i
Opening the rear soft top is possible
after the retractable soft top has been
opened completely.
Notes on the soft top system
!
When transporting long objects inside
the vehicle, make sure they do not press
against the retractable soft top when it
is closed.
When carrying objects that protrude from
the rear of the vehicle, make sure they
are not resting on the retaining clips.
Soft top system (cabriolet only)
71
>> Controls.
Z
When loading, make sure no sharp objects
come into contact with the soft top or the
rear window.
Do not place any evenly distributed loads
with a weight of more than 165 lbs (75 kg)
on the rear soft top when folded down.
Make sure the high-mounted brake lamp
is not concealed.
!
Do not block the soft top system’s lock-
ing apertures.
Only place the side rails in the desig-
nated storage space of the tailgate.
!
Do not sit on the folded-down rear soft
top.
Do not fold down the rear soft top at tem-
peratures below 14¦ (-10¥).
Do not place any pointed, sharp-edged,
hot (above 176¦ [80¥]), incandescent or
burning objects on the soft top’s lining.
Do not apply wax to the soft top fabric and
select only wax-free washing products
when using an automatic car wash.
Only drive with the retaining clips
closed, as exhaust fumes could otherwise
reach the vehicle’s interior.
!
Please keep in mind that weather con-
ditions can sometimes change rapidly.
Make sure to close the retractable soft
top and the rear soft top when leaving the
vehicle. If water enters the vehicle
interior, vehicle electronics could be
damaged which is not covered by the
smart Limited Warranty.
Opening and closing the retractable
soft top
You can open and close the retractable soft
top when the vehicle is either stationary
or in motion.
G
WARNING
Never operate the retractable soft top if
there is the possibility of anyone being
harmed by the opening or closing proce-
dure.
G
WARNING
The retractable soft top is made out of fab-
ric. In the event of an accident, the fabric
may tear. This may result in an opening in
the roof.
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wear-
ing their seat belts or not wearing them
properly may be thrown out of the opening.
Such an opening also presents a potential
for injury for occupants wearing their seat
belts properly as entire body parts or por-
tions of them may protrude from the
passenger compartment.
G
WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch, take it with
you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave chil-
dren unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
unsupervised access to a vehicle could
result in an accident and/or serious per-
sonal injury.
!
To avoid damaging the seals, do not
transport any objects with sharp edges
which can stick out of the retractable
soft top.
Do not open the retractable soft top if
there is snow or ice on the roof, as this
could result in malfunctions.
If you cannot open or close the retracta-
ble soft top due to a malfunction contact
Roadside Assistance or an authorized
smart center.
i
To avoid draining the battery, leave the
engine running when opening and clos-
ing the retractable soft top.
Opening from outside
You can open the retractable soft top com-
pletely with the key.
72
Soft top system (cabriolet only)
>> Controls.
Key with remote control
:
* Lock button
;
$ Opening the retractable soft top
=
# Unlock button
X
Press button $ on the key for approx-
imately two seconds.
The retractable soft top opens com-
pletely.
Opening from the inside
X
Make sure the key is in starter switch
position 1.
X
Press symbol ; on the retractable soft
top switch until the desired position is
reached or the retractable soft top is
opened completely.
or
X
Press symbol ; on the retractable soft
top switch briefly.
The retractable soft top opens com-
pletely.
i
Pressing symbol : or ; on the
retractable soft top switch while open-
ing the retractable soft top will inter-
rupt the opening procedure.
Closing
For safety reasons, you can only close the
retractable soft top using the retractable
soft top switch inside the vehicle.
X
Make sure the key is in starter switch
position 1.
X
Press symbol : on the retractable soft
top switch until the retractable soft top
is closed.
Opening and closing the rear soft top
You can open and close the rear soft top
when the vehicle is either stationary or in
motion.
G
WARNING
Never operate the rear soft top if there is
the possibility of anyone being harmed by
the opening or closing procedure.
!
Make sure objects are not stacked too
high in the cargo compartment. They
could get damaged when opening or clos-
ing the rear soft top.
!
When the rear soft top is folded down,
the side rails are accessible. To prevent
theft, you should remove the side rails
and store them in the storage compart-
ment of the tailgate or close the soft top
system.
X
Make sure the key is in starter switch
position 1.
Soft top system (cabriolet only)
73
>> Controls.
Z
Retractable soft top switch
:
Closing
;
Opening
Opening the rear soft top
X
Press symbol ; on the retractable soft
top switch or button $ on the key until
the retractable soft top has opened com-
pletely.
X
Release retractable soft top switch ; or
button $ on the key.
X
Press symbol ; on the retractable soft
top switch once more until the rear soft
top has folded down completely.
Closing the rear soft top
X
Press symbol : on the retractable soft
top switch until the rear soft top has
folded up completely.
X
Release retractable soft top switch :.
i
If you release the retractable soft top
switch while driving before the rear soft
top has closed completely, the rear soft
top will fold down again.
Removing the side rails
X
Open the retractable soft top
(Y page 56).
X
Open the rear soft top (Y page 73).
X
Open the driver’s and passenger door
when conditions are safe to do so.
X
Open the tailgate (Y page 56).
X
Pull handle : on the inside of the tail-
gate backward.
X
Lift up the storage compartment cover.
X
Push release lever = of side rail ;
backward.
Side rail ; can be lifted at the rear end,
but remains secured.
X
Push release lever = backward again.
74
Soft top system (cabriolet only)
>> Controls.
X
Carry out the following steps when con-
ditions are safe to do so.
X
First lift the side rail at the rear end in
direction of arrows ?.
X
Then remove it in direction of
arrows A.
Storing the side rails
:
Front right
;
Rear right
=
Rear left
?
Front left
X
Store the side rails in the storage com-
partment of the tailgate with the painted
side facing down in the designated
order : to ?.
:
Front right
;
Rear right
=
Rear left
?
Front left
X
Close the storage compartment cover.
X
Press on the “PRESS” marking in the mid-
dle of the storage compartment cover
until it engages audibly.
G
WARNING
Always close the storage compartment cover
properly when storing the side rails. Oth-
erwise occupants could be injured by the
side rails moving about during
R
braking
R
vehicle maneuvers
R
an accident
X
Close the tailgate. Let the tailgate lock
into place.
X
Close the driver’s and passenger door.
X
Open the side windows if desired.
!
Make sure the storage compartment
cover is closed before closing the tail-
gate. Otherwise the tailgate could jam.
Mounting the side rails
X
Open the driver’s and passenger door
when conditions are safe to do so.
X
Open the tailgate.
X
Pull handle : on the inside of the tail-
gate backward.
X
Lift up the storage compartment cover.
X
Remove the side rails from the storage
compartment in the tailgate.
Soft top system (cabriolet only)
75
>> Controls.
Z
;
Front right
=
Rear right
?
Rear left
A
Front left
X
Install the side rails with the respective
front end ; or A first.
G
WARNING
Make sure the side rails are properly
mounted. Otherwise the side rails could
disengage while driving and injure you and
other persons.
X
Take one side rail and start by attaching
it to front end D.
X
Make sure the seal of the side rail is
facing up at position B and is not
pinched.
X
Push the side rail at rear end C down-
wards until it audibly engages into place
twice.
X
Install the side rail on the other side in
the same manner.
!
Make sure the side rails are installed
correctly. Otherwise the side rails may
not function properly or may be damaged.
X
Close the storage compartment cover.
X
Press on the “PRESS” marking in the mid-
dle of the storage compartment cover
until it engages audibly.
X
Close the tailgate. Let the tailgate lock
into place.
X
Close the driver’s and passenger door.
X
Open the side windows if desired.
!
Make sure the storage compartment
cover is closed before closing the tail-
gate. Otherwise the tailgate could jam.
Side windows
Opening and closing the side windows
Opening and closing the side windows
manually
Crank for side window on passenger door
Side window on the driver’s door
X
Opening: Turn crank : counterclock-
wise.
X
Closing: Turn crank : clockwise.
Side window on the passenger door
X
Opening: Turn crank : clockwise.
X
Closing: Turn crank : counterclock-
wise.
76
Side windows
>> Controls.
Opening and closing the power windows
This feature is only available on the model
passion and BRABUS.
G
WARNING
Do not keep any part of your body up against
the side window pane when opening a win-
dow. The downward motion of the pane may
pull that part of your body down between the
window pane and the door frame and trap it
there. If there is a risk of entrapment,
release the switch and pull up the top of the
switch to close the window.
G
WARNING
When closing the windows, make sure there
is no danger of anyone being harmed by the
closing procedure.
The closing of the side windows can be
immediately stopped by releasing the
switch.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch, take it with
you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave chil-
dren unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
unsupervised access to a vehicle could
result in an accident and/or serious per-
sonal injury.
The switches for both power windows are on
the driver’s door. In addition, there is a
switch for the passenger side on the
passenger door.
:
Side window driver’s door
;
Side window passenger door
X
Make sure the key is in starter switch
position 1.
X
Opening: Press and hold the top of the
respective switch.
The corresponding side window moves
downwards until you release the switch.
X
Closing: Pull and hold the top of the
respective switch.
The corresponding side window moves
upwards until you release the switch.
X
Automatic opening: Press the top of the
respective switch briefly.
The corresponding side window opens
completely.
X
Stopping during automatic opening:
Press or pull the top of the respective
switch again.
The corresponding side window stops
immediately.
Driving and parking
Starting
G
WARNING
Make sure absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of motion.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
obstacles. If there are any floormats* or
carpets in the footwell, make sure the ped-
als still have sufficient clearance.
During sudden acceleration or braking
maneuvers, the objects could get caught
between or beneath the pedals and restrict
your ability to brake or accelerate. This
could lead to accidents and/or injury.
G
WARNING
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains car-
bon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can
cause unconsciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
Driving and parking
77
>> Controls.
* optional
Z
fumes are entering the vehicle while driv-
ing, have the cause determined and cor-
rected immediately. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive only with at
least one window fully open at all times.
Gearshift pattern for transmission
:
Release button
j
Park position
k
Reverse gear
i
Neutral position
h
Drive position
p
Manual gearshifting
q
Upshifting
±
Downshifting
Starting the engine
!
Shift the transmission into park posi-
tion P or reverse gear R only when the
vehicle is stopped in order to avoid dam-
aging the transmission.
X
Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to park position P.
The transmission position indicator
should be on PP.
X
Do not depress the accelerator pedal.
X
Turn the key to starter switch position
2 and release it.
The engine starts automatically (“touch-
start” function).
Driving
i
The vehicle has a crawler function. The
vehicle moves forward when the brake
pedal is released.
X
Depress the brake pedal.
X
Press release button : (Y page 78) to
disengage the gear selector lever lock.
X
Move the gear selector lever to drive
position D.
DD appears in the transmission position
indicator.
X
Release the brake pedal.
The vehicle moves forward.
X
Depress the accelerator pedal smoothly.
The vehicle accelerates.
G
WARNING
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This
could result in drive wheel slip and
reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS
will not prevent this type of loss of control.
G
WARNING
It is dangerous to shift the transmission
out of park position P or neutral position
N if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake
pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your
right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
!
Do not run a cold engine at high engine
speeds. Running a cold engine at high
engine speeds may shorten the service
life of the engine.
!
Simultaneously depressing the accel-
erator pedal and applying the brakes
reduces engine performance and causes
premature brake and drivetrain wear.
78
Driving and parking
>> Controls.
Reversing the vehicle
!
Shift the transmission into reverse
gear R only when the vehicle is stopped
in order to avoid damaging the trans-
mission.
You can drive in reverse gear at a speed
of up to 9 mph (15 km/h).
i
The vehicle has a crawler function.
Thevehicle moves forward when the
brakepedal is released.
X
Depress the brake pedal.
X
Press the release button (Y page 78) to
disengage the gear selector lever lock.
X
Move the gear selector lever to reverse
gear R.
RR appears in the transmission position
indicator.
X
Release the brake pedal.
The vehicle moves forward.
X
Depress the accelerator pedal smoothly.
The vehicle accelerates.
Parking
G
WARNING
Do not park this vehicle in areas where
combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system. These materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
Vehicle movement can cause serious per-
sonal injury or damage to the vehicle or the
vehicle drivetrain. Therefore, always do
the following before turning off the engine
and leaving the vehicle:
R
Keep right foot on the brake pedal.
R
Engage the parking brake.
R
Move the gear selector lever to park
position P.
R
Slowly release the brake pedal.
R
When parked on an incline, always turn
the front wheels towards the curb.
R
Turn the key to starter switch position 0
and remove the key from the starter
switch.
R
Take the key with you and lock the vehicle
when leaving.
G
WARNING
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steer-
ing* systems. In this case, it is important
to keep in mind that a considerably higher
degree of effort is necessary to brake and
steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving
accordingly.
X
Properly stop and park the vehicle.
X
Depress the brake pedal.
X
Engage the parking brake (Y page 79).
When the ignition is switched on or the
engine is running, the brake warning
lamp $ (USA only) or J (Canada
only) in the instrument cluster comes on.
X
Release the brake pedal.
Parking brake
The parking brake serves to secure the
vehicle against rolling away when it is
stationary or parked.
G
WARNING
Engaging the parking brake while the vehi-
cle is in motion can cause the rear wheels
to lock up. You could lose control of the
vehicle and cause an accident. In addition,
the vehicle’s brake lights do not light up
when the parking brake is engaged.
Driving and parking
79
>> Controls.
* optional
Z
X
Releasing: Depress the brake pedal.
X
Pull up slightly on parking brake
lever ; and press release button :.
X
Push parking brake lever ; down as far
as it will go.
When the ignition is switched on or the
engine is running, the brake warning
lamp $ (USA only) or J (Canada
only) in the instrument cluster goes out.
X
Engaging: Pull up parking brake
lever ; firmly.
When the ignition is switched on or the
engine is running, the brake warning
lamp $ (USA only) or J (Canada
only) in the instrument cluster comes on.
G
WARNING
Getting out of your vehicle with the trans-
mission not fully engaged in park position
P is dangerous. When the engine is shut off
and the brakes are released, the vehicle can
be moved freely with the gear selector lever
in all positions except park position P.
Also, when parked on an incline, park posi-
tion P alone may not prevent your vehicle
from moving, possibly hitting people or
objects.
Always engage the parking brake in addi-
tion to shifting to park position P.
When parked on an incline, always turn the
front wheels towards the curb.
G
WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch, take it with
you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave chil-
dren unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children
could release the parking brake and/or
move the gear selector lever from park
position P, either of which could result in
an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Brake pedal
The brake pedal has two brake circuits
independent of each other. A brake servo is
used during braking (when the engine is
running) to increase pedal force.
G
WARNING
Make sure absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of motion.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
obstacles. If there are any floormats* or
carpets in the footwell, make sure the ped-
als still have sufficient clearance.
During sudden acceleration or braking
maneuvers, the objects could get caught
between or beneath the pedals and restrict
your ability to brake or accelerate. This
could lead to accidents and/or injury.
G
WARNING
Considerably more effort will be required
to apply the brakes if
R
the brake servo has failed
R
a brake circuit has failed
R
the engine is switched off, e.g. for tow-
ing the vehicle
The braking distance is likewise greater.
Make sure the engine is running whenever
the vehicle is rolling. Have the brake sys-
tem repaired at an authorized smart center,
if there is a fault in the brake system.
80
Driving and parking
>> Controls.
* optional
If a brake circuit has failed (Y page 164),
you must depress brake pedal : further
down to achieve the same effect and the
braking distance is increased.
i
The brake servo will only function with
the engine switched on.
G
WARNING
In the event of the vehicle needing to be
towed, a significantly greater amount of
pedal pressure will be required when the
engine is switched off.
Turning off the engine
G
WARNING
Do not turn off the engine before the vehi-
cle has come to a complete stop. With the
engine not running, there is no power
assistance for the brake and steering* sys-
tems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree
of effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle.
X
Depress the brake pedal.
X
Press the release button (Y page 78) to
disengage the gear selector lever lock.
X
Move the gear selector lever to park
position P.
The transmission position indicator
should be on PP
!
Always engage the parking brake in
addition to shifting to park position P.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Turn the key to starter switch position
0.
X
Remove the key from the starter switch.
The electronic immobilizer is acti-
vated.
Transmission
Introduction
Your vehicle is equipped with a 5‑speed
automated transmission with manual or
automatic mode. For information on driv-
ing with the transmission see also “Start-
ing” (Y page 77).
G
WARNING
Make sure absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of motion.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
obstacles. If there are any floormats* or
carpets in the footwell, make sure the ped-
als still have sufficient clearance.
During sudden acceleration or braking
maneuvers, the objects could get caught
between or beneath the pedals and restrict
your ability to brake or accelerate. This
could lead to accidents and/or injury.
Gear selector lever
Gearshift pattern for transmission
:
Release button
Transmission
81
>> Controls.
* optional
Z
j
Park position
k
Reverse gear
i
Neutral position
h
Drive position
p
Manual gearshifting
q
Upshifting
±
Downshifting
The current gear selector lever position
appears in the transmission position
indicator. When manual gearshifting M is
selected, the currently selected gear
appears (Y page 87).
G
WARNING
It is dangerous to shift the transmission
out of park position P or neutral position
N if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake
pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your
right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Shifting procedure
The transmission selects individual gears
automatically, depending on:
R
the gear selector lever position D
(Y page 83)
R
the position of the accelerator pedal
(Y page 83)
R
the vehicle speed
R
uphill or downhill grades
Press release button : (Y page 81) to dis-
engage the gear selector lever lock when
moving the gear selector lever from
R
P to R, N, or D
R
R to P
R
N to R or P
!
Allow the engine to warm up under low
load use. Do not place full load on the
engine until the operating temperature
has been reached.
Shift into reverse gear R or parking
position P only when the vehicle is stop-
ped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period when driving off on
slippery road surfaces. Otherwise, the
drivetrain could be damaged, which is
not covered by the smart Limited War-
ranty.
With manual gearshifting M selected
(Y page 84), you can use the gear selector
lever or steering wheel gearshift control
to change the gears manually.
82
Transmission
>> Controls.
Gear selector lever positions
Effect
B
Park position
Gear selector lever position
when the vehicle is parked.
Place the gear selector lever
in park position P only when
the vehicle is stopped. The
park position is not intended
to serve as a brake when the
vehicle is parked.
Rather, the driver should
always engage the parking
brake in addition to placing
the gear selector lever in park
position P to secure the vehi-
cle.
The key can only be removed
from the starter switch with
the gear selector lever in park
position P. With the key
removed, the gear selector
lever is locked in park posi-
tion P.
C
Reverse gear
Shift into reverse gear R only
when vehicle is stopped.
A
Neutral position
No power is transmitted from
the engine to the drive axle.
When the brakes are released,
the vehicle can be moved
freely (pushed or towed).
7
Drive position
The transmission shifts auto-
matically.
x
Manual gearshifting
System-controlled automatic
gearshifting is switched off.
The driver has to change the
gears manually.
The current gear selector lever position
appears in the transmission position
indicator (Y page 87).
Driving tips
Accelerator pedal position
Your driving style influences the trans-
mission’s shifting behavior:
Less throttleearlier upshifting
More throttle later upshifting
Kickdown
Use kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
X
Press the accelerator pedal past the
point of resistance.
Depending on the engine speed the trans-
mission shifts into a lower gear.
X
Ease up on the accelerator pedal when you
have reached the desired speed.
The transmission shifts up again.
Stopping
When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic
lights:
X
Leave the transmission in gear.
X
Hold the vehicle with the brake.
When you stop for a longer period with the
engine idling and/or on a hill:
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Move the gear selector lever to park
position P.
Working on the vehicle
G
WARNING
When working on the vehicle, engage the
parking brake and move the gear selector
lever to park position P. Otherwise the
vehicle could roll away which could result
Transmission
83
>> Controls.
Z
in an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Driving on uphill grades
G
WARNING
The hill-start assist system is not
designed to function as a parking brake and
does not prevent the vehicle from moving
when parked on an incline.
Always engage the parking brake in addi-
tion to shifting to park position P.
!
When the hill‑start assist system stops
braking the vehicle, it can roll back-
wards.
If you open the driver’s door, the
hill‑start assist system is deactivated
and a warning signal sounds.
Your vehicle has a hill‑start assist system.
On uphill grades the hill‑start assist sys-
tem maintains the pressure in the brake
system for approximately one second after
you have released the brake pedal. There-
fore, you can start off smoothly without the
vehicle moving immediately after releas-
ing the brake pedal.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Apply sufficient pressure to the accel-
erator pedal to drive off.
On uphill grades with higher inclination,
the hill-start assist system will release
the pressure in the brake system after
approximately two seconds. A warning sig-
nal sounds and the transmission position
indicator shows a flashing NN in order to
warn you of the vehicle rolling backwards.
X
Press the brake pedal.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Apply sufficient pressure to the accel-
erator pedal to drive off.
i
The hill‑start assist system is inactive
if you start off with the parking brake
engaged.
Manual gearshifting
With manual gearshifting M selected, sys-
tem-controlled automatic gearshifting is
switched off and you need to change the
gears by upshifting or downshifting man-
ually using the gear selector lever or the
steering wheel gearshift control
10
.
!
Allow the engine to warm up under low
load use. Do not place full load on the
engine until the operating temperature
has been reached.
Shift into reverse gear R or parking
position P only when the vehicle is stop-
ped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period when driving off on
slippery road surfaces. Otherwise, the
drivetrain could be damaged, which is
not covered by the smart Limited War-
ranty.
10
Model passion and BRABUS only.
84
Transmission
>> Controls.
Activating manual gearshifting
X
Move the gear selector lever to drive
position D (Y page 81).
X
Pull one of the shift paddles (Y page 84)
towards you.
or
X
Move the gear selector lever to manual
gearshifting M (Y page 81).
System-controlled automatic gearshift-
ing is switched off.
You can upshift or downshift through the
gears in succession.
The currently engaged gear appears in the
multifunction display (Y page 84).
Upshifting
X
Briefly push the gear selector lever
forward in the + direction (Y page 81).
or
X
Pull right shift paddle ; (Y page 84)
towards you.
The transmission shifts to the next
higher gear.
i
With manual gearshifting M selected,
the transmission shifts up only to pre-
vent engine overrevving.
Downshifting
G
WARNING
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This
could result in drive wheel slip and
reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS
will not prevent this type of loss of control.
X
Briefly pull the gear selector lever
backward in the - direction (Y page 81).
or
X
Pull left shift paddle : (Y page 84)
towards you.
The transmission shifts to the next lower
gear.
Kickdown
You can use kickdown when you want maxi-
mum acceleration.
X
Press the accelerator pedal past the
point of resistance.
Depending on the engine speed the trans-
mission shifts into a lower gear.
X
When you have reached the desired speed,
briefly push the gear selector lever
forward in the + direction (Y page 81).
or
X
Pull right shift paddle ; (Y page 84)
towards you.
The transmission shifts to the next
higher gear.
Deactivating manual gearshifting
X
With drive position D selected: Pull and
hold right shift paddle ; (Y page 84)
towards you for longer than two seconds.
or
X
With manual gearshifting M selected:
Move the gear selector lever to drive
position D (Y page 81).
System-controlled automatic gearshift-
ing is switched on again.
Emergency operation (limp-home
mode)
In this mode only a certain gear or a cer-
tain gear combination can be selected.
This mode is triggered in case of trans-
mission malfunctions and enables you
driving to the nearest workshop such as a
smart center.
If vehicle acceleration becomes less
responsive or sluggish or the transmission
no longer shifts, the transmission is most
likely operating in limp-home (emergency
operation) mode. The transmission posi-
tion indicator flashes and the ¬ symbol
appears in the multifunction display.
Transmission
85
>> Controls.
Z
Driving in limp-home mode:
X
Move the gear selector lever to drive
position D (Y page 81).
X
Continue to drive.
X
Have the transmission checked at an
authorized smart center as soon as pos-
sible.
i
It is possible that a gear combination
including the reverse gear can not be
selected. Keep in mind when parking,
that reversing the vehicle might be
impossible.
In case of a minor transmission malfunc-
tion, it might be possible to teach-in the
transmission in order to restore the nor-
mal transmission mode.
i
If the attempt to teach-in the trans-
mission fails, you cannot continue to
drive. Therefore we strongly recommend
that you have the transmission taught-in
at a qualified workshop or at an author-
ized smart center.
Teaching-in the transmission system:
X
Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
X
Move the gear selector lever to park
position P.
X
Turn off the engine.
X
Wait at least 30 seconds before restart-
ing.
X
Press the brake pedal.
X
Restart the engine
Three bars instead of PP appear in the
multifunction display.
X
Wait at least 30 seconds.
The transmission is taught in.
When teaching-in was successful: PP
appears in the multifunction display again
and normal transmission operating is
restored.
X
Continue to drive.
After an unsuccessful teaching-in: Three
bars instead of PP appear in the multifunc-
tion display.
X
Do not continue to drive.
X
Turn off the engine.
X
Engage the parking brake when leaving
the vehicle.
X
Contact Roadside Assistance or an
authorized smart center.
Instrument cluster
Multifunction display
The following displays and indicators
appear in the multifunction display:
Multifunction display (U.S. vehicles)
:
Maintenance service symbol (status
indicator)
;
Main odometer display and days or dis-
tance to next maintenance service
=
Transmission position indicator
?
Digital clock
A
Outside temperature display
B
Fuel level display
C
Status indicator with:
• Trip odometer display
• Reserve fuel indicator
86
Instrument cluster
>> Controls.
Multifunction display (Canada vehicles)
:
Maintenance service symbol (status
indicator)
;
Main odometer display and days or dis-
tance to next maintenance service
=
Transmission position indicator
?
Digital clock
A
Outside temperature display
B
Freeze warning
C
Fuel level display
D
Status indicator with:
• Trip odometer display
• Reserve fuel indicator
G
WARNING
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction
display is inoperative.
As a result, you will not be able to see
information about your driving condi-
tions, such as speed, outside temperature,
or warning/indicator lamps. Driving char-
acteristics may be impaired.
If you must continue to drive, please do so
with added caution. Visit an authorized
smart center as soon as possible.
Multifunction display illumination
The multifunction display illumination
comes on when the starter switch is in posi-
tion 1. It goes out after approximately
30 seconds when the starter switch is in
position 0.
For adjusting the multifunction display
illumination, see “Adjusting instrument
cluster illumination” (Y page 92).
Main odometer display
Example illustration (U.S. vehicles)
i
Canada vehicles: The main odometer
display shows kmkm instead of milesmiles.
The main odometer display appears in the
multifunction display continuously.
Exception: The next maintenance service
is due. After starting the engine, days or
distance to next maintenance service will
appear instead of the main odometer dis-
play. The main odometer display will reap-
pear after approximately ten seconds.
For information on how to select the main-
tenance service interval display, see
“Maintenance service interval display”
(Y page 90).
Transmission position indicator
The following information is displayed in
the transmission position indicator:
R
Current gear selector lever position
R
Current engaged gear (when manual gear-
shifting selected)
i
A flashing RR in the display indicates
that the gear selector lever is in posi-
tion R but the reverse gear is not
engaged. Stop the vehicle to let the
reverse gear engage.
Instrument cluster
87
>> Controls.
Z
Example illustration (U.S. vehicles)
Display Function
PP
Gear selector lever in park
position P
RR
Gear selector lever in posi-
tion R (Reverse gear engaged)
NN
Gear selector lever in neutral
position N
DD
Gear selector lever in drive
position D
When manual gearshifting is selected:
Display Function
11
First gear engaged
22
Second gear engaged
33
Third gear engaged
44
Fourth gear engaged
55
Fifth gear engaged
Digital clock
Example illustration (U.S. vehicles)
i
Canada vehicles: The digital clock
shows a 24 h-clock instead of a
12 h-clock.
The time can only be set as long as the colon
in the digital clock flashes.
X
Activating time setting: Press and hold
right button ; until the colon in the
digital clock starts flashing.
X
Setting the time in 1 minute incre-
ments: Press left button : or right but-
ton ; repeatedly until the desired time
is set.
X
Setting the time quickly: Press left but-
ton : or right button ; for longer than
one second.
The setting speed increases.
X
Setting the time in 10 minute incre-
ments: Press left button : or right but-
ton ; for longer than five seconds.
The time is set in 10 minute increments.
88
Instrument cluster
>> Controls.
X
Confirm time setting: Refrain from
pressing either left button : or right
button ; until the colon in the digital
clock stops flashing.
The time is set.
i
The digital clock in the multifunction
display is not synchronized with the
cockpit clock* (Y page 91).
Outside temperature display
G
WARNING
The outside temperature display is not
designed as an ice-warning device and is
therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the
freezing point do not guarantee that the
road surface is free of ice. The road may
still be icy, especially in wooded areas or
on bridges. Your vehicle could start to skid
if you do not adjust your driving style
accordingly.
Therefore, always adjust your driving style
to the prevailing road and weather condi-
tions.
Example illustration (U.S. vehicles)
i
Canada vehicles: The outside tempera-
ture display shows °C°C instead of °F°F.
The outside temperature display appears
in the multifunction display continuously.
A change of the outside temperature will be
displayed with delay.
Freeze warning (Canada vehicles only)
When the outside temperature falls below
3¥, the multifunction display makes you
aware of the fact that the road may be icy.
An additional freeze warning, i.e. an ice
crystal symbol, in the multifunction dis-
play flashes. After 60 seconds, the freeze
warning stops flashing but continues to be
displayed. When the outside temperature
rises above 3¥, the freeze warning goes
out.
Fuel level display
Example illustration (U.S. vehicles)
The fuel level display shows the tank’s fuel
level with the aid of eight segments. The
number of dark segments indicates the fuel
level in the tank. If all eight segments are
dark, the tank is full.
You are driving on reserve fuel if there are
no more than 1.0 US gal (3.78 l) of fuel in the
tank.
Instrument cluster
89
>> Controls.
* optional
Z
If this occurs,
R
the fuel pump symbol in the fuel level
display flashes
R
the reserve fuel indicator shows the fuel
level in the tank in 0.1 US gal (0.5 l)
increments
For selecting the reserve fuel indicator to
be displayed in the status indicator, see
“Reserve fuel indicator” (Y page 91).
Selecting display for status indicator
You can select the information to be dis-
played in the status indicator:
R
Trip odometer display (Y page 90)
R
Maintenance service interval display
(Y page 90)
R
Reserve fuel indicator (Y page 91)
(when less than 1.0 US gal (3.78 l) of fuel
is in the tank)
:
Selecting display for status indicator,
setting the clock, activating mainte-
nance service interval display
;
Setting the clock, adjusting instrument
cluster illumination
Trip odometer display
Example illustration (U.S. vehicles)
X
Selecting trip odometer display: Press
left button : (Y page 90) repeatedly
until the trip odometer display appears
in the status indicator.
X
Resetting trip odometer display: Press
and hold left button : (Y page 90) until
the value is set to 00.
Maintenance service interval display
Example illustration (U.S. vehicles)
i
Canada vehicles: The maintenance
service interval display shows kmkm
instead of milesmiles.
The maintenance service interval display
will notify you approximately one month
before the next maintenance service is
due.
The following information will be dis-
played after starting the engine:
R
Days or distance to next maintenance
service
90
Instrument cluster
>> Controls.
This information will be displayed
instead of the main odometer display.
The main odometer display will reappear
after approximately ten seconds
(Y page 87).
R
Type of service that is due
This information will be displayed in
the status indicator.
X
Start the engine.
X
Selecting maintenance service interval
display: Press button : on the instru-
ment cluster repeatedly until the main-
tenance service interval display
appears in the status indicator.
Depending on the type of maintenance
service that is due, symbol ¬ or } is
displayed.
X
Clearing maintenance service interval
display: Press button : once.
The maintenance service interval dis-
play is cleared.
X
Activating maintenance service inter-
val display: Press button : twice in
quick succession.
Reserve fuel indicator
Example illustration (U.S. vehicles)
The reserve fuel indicator is only dis-
played when driving on reserve fuel.
X
Selecting reserve fuel indicator: Press
button : on the instrument cluster
repeatedly until the reserve fuel indi-
cator appears in the status indicator.
Auxiliary instruments*
:
Tachometer
;
Cockpit clock
Tachometer*
The tachometer displays the engine speed
in units of 1000 rpm.
The tachometer can be turned by approx-
imately 90°.
The tachometer illumination comes on when
you switch on the ignition and the exterior
lighting.
Instrument cluster
91
>> Controls.
* optional
Z
!
Do not hang any objects on the tachom-
eter.
This could cause the tachometer to be
torn from its mountings and damage it.
Cockpit clock*
The cockpit clock can be turned by approx-
imately 90°.
The cockpit clock illumination comes on
when you switch on the ignition and the
exterior lighting.
The buttons for setting the time are on the
top of the cockpit clock.
X
Setting the time back in 1 minute incre-
ments: Press button : repeatedly until
the desired time is set.
X
Setting the time back quickly: Press but-
ton : for longer than two seconds.
The setting speed accelerates.
X
Setting the time forward in 1 minute
increments: Press button ; repeatedly
until the desired time is set.
X
Setting the time forward quickly: Press
button ; for longer than two seconds.
The setting speed accelerates.
!
Do not hang any objects on the cockpit
clock.
This could cause the cockpit clock to be
torn from its mounting and damage it.
Adjusting instrument cluster illumi-
nation
You can adjust the illumination of the
switches, the dials in the instrument clus-
ter, the radio*, the climate control* panel
and the auxiliary instruments*. Five illu-
mination levels are available.
X
Make sure the key is in starter switch
position 1.
X
Switch on the parking lamps.
X
To brighten or dim illumination: Press
button : on the instrument cluster
repeatedly until the desired setting is
reached.
The current setting is stored.
Control system*
Introduction
The control system is activated when you
turn the key in the starter switch to posi-
tion 1.
G
WARNING
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving.
In order to avoid distraction which could
lead to an accident, the driver should
select features and change settings in the
control system only vehicle at a standstill
or when traffic and road conditions permit
it to be done safely.
92
Control system*
>> Controls.
* optional
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h ), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approx-
imately 14 m) every second.
Control lever
You can select the displays in the multi-
function display and change settings in the
control system with the control lever.
Control lever (example illustration coupé)
:
Control switch
Pressing up selects a menu.
;
OK button
Confirming a selection.
Scrolling through stored messages
in the MessagesMessages menu
=
Control switch
Pressing down selects a menu.
Multifunction display
The multifunction display shows values and
settings as well as display messages.
X
Activating the multifunction display:
Unlock the vehicle.
X
Confirming messages: Press the OK but-
ton on the control lever briefly
(Y page 93).
X
Exiting menu: Press the control switch on
the control lever up or down until the
message BackBack appears in the multifunc-
tion display.
X
Press the OK button on the control lever
briefly.
Control system*
93
>> Controls.
* optional
Z
Menus and submenus
Function
:
OdometerOdometer menu (Y page 94)
;
ConsumptionConsumption menu (Y page 95)
=
YSTARTSTART menu (trip statistics since start) (Y page 95)
?
YRESETRESET menu (trip statistics since last reset) (Y page 95)
A
MessagesMessages menu (Y page 96)
B
SettingsSettings menu (Y page 96)
C
TimeTime menu (Y page 97)
Odometer menu
The OdometerOdometer menu shows you either the
main odometer and the trip odometer or the
trip odometer with the amount of fuel left
the fuel tank.
:
Main odometer
;
Trip odometer
=
Remaining fuel
X
Press the control switch on the control
lever (Y page 93) up or down until the
94
Control system*
>> Controls.
* optional
OdometerOdometer menu appears in the multi-
function display.
X
To switch between submenus: Press the OK
button on the control lever briefly.
X
To reset the trip odometer: Select the
trip odometer display.
X
Press button B on the instrument cluster
until the trip odometer is reset to 0
(Y page 21).
Consumption menu
The ConsumptionConsumption menu shows you the cur-
rent fuel consumption.
X
Press the control switch on the control
lever (Y page 93) up or down until the
ConsumptionConsumption menu appears in the multi-
function display.
The current current fuel consumption
appears.
i
Depending on the selected unit in the
settings menu (Y page 96), the consump-
tion is displayed in in miles per gal-
lon (mpg) or in liters per 100 kilome-
ters (l/100 km).
Canada only: When the vehicle is stand-
ing, the fuel consumption is displayed in
gallons per hour (gal/h) or liters per
hour (l/h).
Start menu
The YSTARTSTART menu shows you the trip statis-
tics since start.
:
Average speed since start
;
Time elapsed since start
=
Distance driven since start
?
Average fuel consumption since start
X
Press the control switch on the control
lever (Y page 93) up or down until the
YSTARTSTART menu appears in the multifunc-
tion display.
X
To reset: Press button B on the instru-
ment cluster until the YSTARTSTART menu is
reset to 0 (Y page 21).
i
The YSTARTSTART menu is reset to 0 automat-
ically
R
when the ignition has been switched
off for more than 4 hours
R
after driving more than 9999 miles or
kilometers
Reset menu
The YRESETRESET menu menu shows you the trip
statistics since the last reset.
:
Average speed since last reset
;
Time elapsed since since last reset
=
Distance driven since last reset
?
Average fuel consumption since since
last reset
X
Press the control switch on the control
lever (Y page 93) up or down until the
Control system*
95
>> Controls.
* optional
Z
YRESETRESET menu appears in the multifunc-
tion display.
X
To reset: Press button B on the instru-
ment cluster until the YRESETRESET menu is
reset to 0 (Y page 21).
Messages menu
The MessagesMessages menu stores messages that
you can call up.
i
When no messages have been stored, the
MessagesMessages menu is not displayed.
X
Press the control switch on the control
lever (Y page 93) up or down until the
MessagesMessages menu appears in the multi-
function display.
The number of stored messages is : dis-
played
X
Press the OK button on the control lever
briefly.
The first stored message appears.
X
To scroll through messages: Press the OK
button on the control lever briefly.
For more information on display messages,
see (Y page 158).
Maintenance service interval display
The maintenance service interval display
will notify you when the next maintenance
service is due and what type of maintenance
service is required.
Example:
R
¯ Care Service in XXX miCare Service in XXX mi
R
° Main Service in XXX miMain Service in XXX mi
R
° Main Service in XX DaysMain Service in XX Days
X
To confirm: Press the OK button on the
control lever briefly.
The mesage is stored.
When the due date for the maintenance
service has been has been passed, the num-
ber of miles (kilometers) or days since are
preceeded by a minus sign.
!
Failure to have the maintenance
service performed at the designated
times/mileage, may result in vehicle
damage that is not covered by the smart
Limited Warranty.
Settings menu
In the SettingsSettings menu, you can select indi-
vidual settings for your vehicle.
The following functions are available:
R
Setting the language
R
Setting the temperature unit
R
Setting the distance and speed unit
X
Press the control switch on the control
lever (Y page 93) up or down until the
SettingsSettings menu appears in the multi-
function display.
X
Press the OK button on the control lever
briefly.
Setting the language
The following languages are available:
R
German
R
US English
R
UK English
R
French
R
Italian
R
Spanish
96
Control system*
>> Controls.
* optional
X
Press the control switch on the control
lever (Y page 93) up or down until the
LanguageLanguage submenu appears in the multi-
function display.
X
Press the OK button on the control lever
briefly.
X
Press the control switch on the control
lever (Y page 93) up or down until the
desired language is selected.
X
Press the OK button on the control lever
briefly to confirm.
The selected language is stored.
Setting the temperature unit
The following units are available:
R
†
R
‡
X
Press the control switch on the control
lever (Y page 93) up or down until the
°F/°C°F/°C submenu appears in the multifunc-
tion display.
X
Press the OK button on the control lever
briefly.
X
Press the control switch on the control
lever (Y page 93) up or down until the
desired unit is selected.
X
Press the OK button on the control lever
briefly to confirm.
The selected unit is stored.
Setting the distance and speed unit
The following units are available:
R
Miles (mi)
R
Kilometers (km)
X
Press the control switch on the control
lever (Y page 93) up or down until the mi–mi–
kmkm submenu appears in the multifunction
display.
X
Press the OK button on the control lever
briefly.
X
Press the control switch on the control
lever (Y page 93) up or down until the
desired unit is selected.
X
Press the OK button on the control lever
briefly to confirm.
The selected unit is stored.
i
Canada only: The unit for the cruise
control (Y page 100) does not change,
regardless of which unit is set in this
menu.
Time menu
The TimeTime menu lets you set the time and
offers different display modes.
The following submenus are available:
R
Setting time display mode (12-hour or
24-hour mode)
R
Setting period of day, am or pm
11
R
Setting the hours
R
Setting the minutes
X
Press the control switch on the control
lever (Y page 93) up or down until the
TimeTime menu appears in the multifunction
display.
X
Press the OK button on the control lever
briefly.
Setting the time display mode
X
Press the control switch on the control
lever (Y page 93) up or down until the
12h 24h12h 24h submenu appears in the multi-
function display.
X
Press the OK button on the control lever
briefly.
X
Press the control switch on the control
lever (Y page 93) up or down until the
desired setting is selected.
X
Press the OK button on the control lever
briefly to confirm.
The selected mode is stored.
11
Only available in 12-hour mode.
Control system*
97
>> Controls.
* optional
Z
Setting the period of day
X
Press the control switch on the control
lever (Y page 93) up or down until the
amam pmpm submenu appears in the multifunc-
tion display.
X
Press the OK button on the control lever
briefly.
X
Press the control switch on the control
lever (Y page 93) up or down until the
desired setting is selected.
X
Press the OK button on the control lever
briefly to confirm.
The selected mode is stored.
Setting the hours
X
Press the control switch on the control
lever (Y page 93) up or down until the
HourHour submenu appears in the multifunc-
tion display.
X
Press the OK button on the control lever
briefly.
X
Press the control switch on the control
lever (Y page 93) up or down until the
desired setting is selected.
X
Press the OK button on the control lever
briefly to confirm.
The selected hours are stored.
Setting the minutes
X
Press the control switch on the control
lever (Y page 93) up or down until the
MinuteMinute submenu appears in the multi-
function display.
X
Press the OK button on the control lever
briefly.
X
Press the control switch on the control
lever (Y page 93) up or down until the
desired setting is selected.
X
Press the OK button on the control lever
briefly to confirm.
The selected minutes are stored.
Audio system*
G
WARNING
In order to avoid distraction which could
lead to an accident, the driver should enter
system settings with the vehicle at a stand-
still and operate the system only when road
and traffic conditions permit. Always pay
full attention to traffic conditions first
before operating system controls while
driving.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approx-
imately 14 m) every second.
G
WARNING
Always select a volume that allows you to
still hear ambient sound in your immediate
vicinity (e.g. horns, emergency rescue
vehicles, police vehicles, etc.). You could
otherwise cause an accident.
G
WARNING
If you wish to have an audio system other
than an original smart audio system fitted
in your vehicle, please always have the nec-
essary work performed at an authorized
smart center.
This is particularly important if your
vehicle is fitted with a radio preinstalla-
tion. Improper connection can result in the
failure of important vehicle functions,
thereby endangering the operating safety
of your vehicle and thus your own safety and
that of other people.
The following pages contain a brief
description of the audio systems available
for the coupé and cabriolet.
The devices are described with their full
complement of equipment. The description
for your individual equipment specifica-
tion applies.
Please refer to the separate operating
instructions for detailed functions.
98
Audio system*
>> Controls.
* optional
Audio system basic*
The audio system basic contains the fol-
lowing functions:
R
Radio (FM/AM)
R
Radio Broadcast Data System (RBDS) and
radio text
R
AUX and USB socket (Y page 99)
!
Please be sure to read the operating
instructions for the audio system basic
before using the unit. Familiarize your-
self with the various functions of the
unit so that you are able to operate it
easily, reliably and correctly at any
time.
:
On/off and volume switch
;
Display
=
Skip/Scroll/Frequency search switches
?
Tone settings/Mute/Back control panel
A
Stored station buttons
B
Radio/Media/System control panel
Audio system navigation/multimedia*
The audio system navigation/multimedia
contains the following functions:
R
Radio (FM/AM)
R
Radio Broadcast Data System (RBDS)
R
AUX and USB-socket
R
Bluetooth
®
hands-free device
R
Navigation
R
Audio operation from CD/DVD or SD Card,
via AUX/USB/iPod
®
, or Bluetooth
®
Audio
R
Video operation from CD/DVD or SD Card,
via AUX/USB/iPod
®
R
Image display from CD/DVD or SD Card,
via USB/iPod
®
!
Please be sure to read the operating
instructions for the audio system navi-
gation/multimedia before using the
unit. Familiarize yourself with the var-
ious functions of the unit so that you are
able to operate it easily, reliably and
correctly at any time.
:
Bluetooth
®
connection indicator lamp
;
Display
=
Microphone
?
Light sensor
A
Eject button
B
Rotary/Push button
C
Menu button
AUX and USB sockets*
You can connect mobile audio devices such
as an MP3 player via the AUX and USB sock-
ets using commercially available 3.5 mm
socket plug (AUX) or USB connector cable
(USB).
The AUX and USB sockets are located in the
glove box.
Audio system*
99
>> Controls.
* optional
Z
:
USB socket
;
AUX socket
smart surround sound system*
The smart surround sound system supple-
ments the existing speakers with more
powerful and additional speakers (includ-
ing a digital amplifier in the passenger
footwell and a passive subwoofer).
Driving systems
Cruise control*
The cruise control maintains the speed you
set for your vehicle automatically. On
downhill grades, the cruise control does
not brake the vehicle via the brake system.
The cruise control can only use the braking
power of the engine. You must apply the
brakes yourself in order to reduce the
vehicle speed. The cruise control will then
be canceled.
G
WARNING
The cruise control is a convenience system
designed to assist the driver during vehi-
cle operation. The cruise control cannot
take road, traffic, and weather conditions
into account. The driver is and must always
remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed
and for safe brake operation.
Do not use the cruise control
R
if the road, traffic, and weather condi-
tions do not make it advisable to travel
at a constant speed
R
on slippery roads
Rapid changes in tire traction can result
in wheel spin and loss of control.
R
when driving in fog
The use of the cruise control is recom-
mended for driving at a constant speed for
extended periods of time.
With the cruise control is activated and a
speed set, the following message appears
in the multifunction display:
U.S. vehicles
:
Cruise control activated
;
Speed has been set
Canada vehicles
:
Cruise control activated
;
Set speed
The cruise control is operated via buttons
on the steering wheel.
100
Driving systems
>> Controls.
* optional
:
Activating or deactivating the cruise
control
;
Resuming at last set speed or increas-
ing speed
=
Setting current or lower speed, or
decreasing speed
?
Canceling the cruise control
Activating/deactivating
The cruise control must be activated before
you can set a speed. When you turn off the
engine, the cruise control is deactivated
automatically.
X
Press ON/OFF button : briefly.
The cruise control is activated.
CRUISECRUISE (USA only) or V (Canada only)
appears in the multifunction display.
Setting current speed
You can set any speed above 20 mph
(30 km/h).
X
Accelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed.
X
With the cruise control activated, press
SET/− button = briefly.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The current speed is set and the vehicle
maintains that speed.
USA only: setset appears in the multifunc-
tion display to indicate that the speed
has been set.
Canada only: The set speed appears in the
multifunction display next to cruise
control symbol V.
i
On uphill grades, the cruise control
may not be able to maintain the set speed.
Once the grade eases, the set speed will
be resumed.
On downhill grades, the cruise control
can only maintain the set speed using the
engine’s braking power. You must apply
the brakes yourself when the vehicle does
not slow down sufficiently. This will
cancel the cruise control.
Canceling cruise control
When the cruise control is activated, you
can cancel it at any time and resume the set
speed later.
X
Press CANCEL button ? briefly.
or
X
Depress the brake pedal.
The cruise control is canceled.
The cruise control deactivates automati-
cally, when
R
you engage the parking brake
R
the vehicle speed is below 20 mphh
(30 km/h)
R
ESP
®
is in operation.
Resuming last set speed
G
WARNING
The “Resume” function should only be oper-
ated if the driver is fully aware of the pre-
viously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
The set speed stored in memory should only
be set again if prevailing road conditions
and legal speed limits permit. Possible
acceleration or deceleration differences
arising from returning to the preset speed
could cause an accident and/or serious
injury to you and others.
Driving systems
101
>> Controls.
Z
X
Press RES/+ button ; briefly.
The cruise control resumes the previ-
ously set speed.
i
The last set speed stored in memory is
deleted when the engine is turned off.
Changing the set speed
You must have set a speed prior to increas-
ing or decreasing the current speed.
i
Depressing the accelerator pedal does
not deactivate the cruise control. After
a brief acceleration (e.g. for passing),
the cruise control will resume the last
set speed.
Continuous adjustment
X
Press and hold RES/+ button ; to
increase the speed.
or
X
Press and hold SET/− = to decrease the
speed.
X
Press and hold the respective button
until the desired speed is reached.
X
Release the respective button.
The new speed is stored.
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada 1 km/h) incre-
ments
X
Press RES/+ button ; briefly to increase
the speed.
or
X
Press SET/− = briefly to decrease the
speed.
The new speed is stored after releasing the
respective button.
HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, Air Con-
ditioning)
Notes on HVAC
G
WARNING
Follow the recommended settings for heat-
ing and cooling given on the following
pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you
and others.
Air conditioning with climate control*
The air conditioning improves the level of
comfort when driving at high outside tem-
peratures by cooling and dehumidifying
the air.
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants, are
filtered out by an integrated particle fil-
ter before outside air enters the passenger
compartment through the air distribution
system. It also operates when the air con-
ditioning is switched off and you have
switched on the blower.
The air conditioning only works when the
engine is running and the blower is
switched on. Maximum effectiveness is
achieved if you drive with the windows
closed.
i
In warmer weather, ventilate the
passenger compartment for a short
period of time before utilizing the air
conditioning.
102
HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning)
>> Controls.
* optional
Control panels HVAC
Heating
:
Air volume control
;
Rear window defroster switch
=
Air distribution control
?
Temperature control
Air conditioning with climate control*
:
Air volume control
;
Air conditioning switch
=
Rear window defroster switch
?
Air recirculation switch
A
Temperature control
B
Air distribution control
Switching HVAC on/off
Heating
Control panel (Y page 103).
X
Switching on: Make sure the key is in
starter switch position 1.
X
Push temperature control ? up.
X
Switching off: Push temperature
control ? fully down.
HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning)
103
>> Controls.
* optional
Z
Air conditioning with climate control*
Control panel (Y page 103).
X
Make sure the engine is running.
X
Switching on: Push air volume
control : to level 1 or higher.
X
Press air conditioning switch ;.
The indicator lamp in air conditioning
switch ; comes on.
X
Switching off: Press air conditioning
switch ; once more.
The indicator lamp in air conditioning
switch ; goes out.
i
The stored status is restored, if you
switch on the ignition again.
i The air condition will be suspended
temporarily:
R
if the engine speed is too low
R
when driving off
The air condition is switched off:
R
at a coolant temperature of more than
239¦ (115¥)
R
at outside temperatures below 38¦
(3¥)
Setting the temperature
Heating
Control panel (Y page 103).
i
You should raise or lower the tempera-
ture setting in small increments.
X
Increasing or decreasing: Push temper-
ature control ? up or down.
Rapid cooling
X
Push air volume control : fully up.
X
Turn air distribution control = to posi-
tion P.
X
Push temperature control ? fully down.
X
Adjust the air vents as desired.
Rapid heating
X
Push air volume control : to level 3.
X
Turn air distribution control = to a
position between z and O.
X
Push temperature control ? fully up.
X
Adjust the air vents towards the occu-
pants.
Air conditioning with climate control*
Control panel (Y page 103).
i
You should raise or lower the tempera-
ture setting in small increments, pref-
erably starting at 70¦ (21¥).
X
Increasing or decreasing: Push temper-
ature control A up or down.
Adjusting air vents
G
WARNING
When operating the heating or air condi-
tioning with climate control*, the air that
enters the passenger compartment through
the air vents can be very hot or very cold
(depending on the set temperature). This
may cause burns or frostbite on unprotected
skin in the immediate area of the air vents.
Always keep sufficient distance between
unprotected parts of the body and the air
vents. If necessary, use the air distribu-
tion control to direct the air to air vents
in the vehicle interior that are not in the
immediate area of unprotected skin.
To make sure the heating or air condition-
ing with climate control* works properly,
please observe the following:
R
Keep the air intake grill free from
deposits, e.g. ice or snow, to ensure that
fresh air can flow freely into the vehicle
interior.
R
Do not obstruct air vents or ventilation
grilles in the vehicle interior.
104
HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning)
>> Controls.
* optional
i
For draft-free ventilation, move the
sliders for the center air vents and side
air vents to the middle position.
Center air vents
:
Left center air vent, adjustable
;
Right center air vent, adjustable
X
Adjusting: Turn slider : or ; to the
left, right, up, or down.
X
Opening: Turn slider : or ; inwards
towards the center console.
X
Closing: Turn slider : or ; fully out-
wards towards the side window.
Side air vents
Side air vents on driver’s side illustrated as
example
:
Left side air vent, adjustable
;
Left side defroster air vent, fixed
X
Adjusting: Turn slider : to the left,
right, up, or down.
X
Opening: Turn slider : inwards towards
the center console.
X
Closing: Turn slider : fully outwards
towards the side window.
Adjusting air distribution
Symbol Function
z
Directs air to the windshield
and side windows
O
Directs air to the footwells
and air distribution is
reduced at the center and side
air vents
P
Directs air through the center
and side air vents
i
You can also turn the air distribution
control to a position between two sym-
bols.
Heating
Control panel (Y page 103).
X
Turn air distribution control = to the
desired symbol.
The air distribution is controlled
depending on the position of the air dis-
tribution control.
Air conditioning with climate control
Control panel (Y page 103).
X
Turn air distribution control B to the
desired symbol.
The air distribution is controlled
depending on the position of the air dis-
tribution control.
HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning)
105
>> Controls.
Z
Adjusting air volume
The air volume is controlled depending on
the blower speed selected. Five blower
speeds are available.
0
Off
1
Slow
2
Medium
3
High/defrosting
4
Maximum
X
Increasing or decreasing: Push air vol-
ume control : up or down.
Defrosting
G
WARNING
Never drive with iced up or fogged win-
dows. Visibility will be significantly
impaired. Impaired visibility could
endanger yourself and others. This may
prevent you from observing the traffic con-
ditions, thereby causing an accident.
The best defrosting of windows is achieved
if the ice is completely removed from the
windows manually with an ice scraper
before starting the engine.
Heating
Control panel (Y page 103).
X
Switching on: Push air volume
control : to level 3.
X
Turn air distribution control = to posi-
tion z.
X
Push temperature control ? fully up.
Air conditioning with climate control
Control panel (Y page 103).
X
Switching on: Push air volume
control : to level 3.
X
Turn air distribution control B to posi-
tion z.
X
Push temperature control A fully up.
Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster serves to de-ice
the rear window quickly and clear the view
if the rear window is fogged.
The rear window defroster uses a large
amount of power. To keep battery drain to a
minimum, switch off the rear window
defroster as soon as the rear window is
clear. The rear window defroster is auto-
matically deactivated after approximately
10 minutes of operation.
X
Make sure the key is in starter switch
position 1.
X
Switching on: Press rear window
defroster switch :.
The indicator lamp in rear window
defroster switch : comes on.
X
Switching off: Press rear window
defroster switch : once more.
The indicator lamp in rear window
defroster switch : goes out.
106
HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning)
>> Controls.
* optional
Air recirculation mode*
Switch to air recirculation mode
12
to pre-
vent unpleasant odors from entering the
vehicle from the outside (e.g. before driv-
ing through a tunnel). This setting cuts off
the intake of outside air and recirculates
the air in the passenger compartment.
G
WARNING
When the air recirculation mode is
switched on, windows can fog on the inside
immediately. Fogged windows impair vis-
ibility, endangering you and others. If the
windows begin to fog on the inside, switch-
ing off the air recirculation mode imme-
diately should clear interior window fog-
ging. If interior window fogging persists,
make sure the air conditioning is switched
on, turn air distribution control B to
position z and increase the air volume
using air volume control :.
Control panel (Y page 103).
X
Switching on: Press air recirculation
switch ?.
The indicator lamp in air recirculation
switch ? comes on.
X
Switching off: Press air recirculation
switch ? once more.
The indicator lamp in air recirculation
switch ? goes out.
Loading and storing
Cup holder
G
WARNING
In order to help prevent spilling liquids
on vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equip-
ment, only use containers that fit into the
cup holder. Use lids on open containers and
do not fill containers to a height where the
contents, especially hot liquids, could
spill during braking, vehicle maneuvers,
or an accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle
occupants may cause serious personal
injury. Liquids spilled on vehicle equip-
ment may cause damage not covered by the
smart Limited Warranty.
Keep in mind that objects placed in a cup
holder may come loose during braking,
vehicle maneuvers, or an accident and be
thrown around in the vehicle interior.
Objects thrown around in the vehicle inter-
ior may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
The cup holder can be used to safely store
sealed drink bottles, containers with a lid,
or beverage cans.
!
Do not use the cup holder as an ashtray.
Otherwise it could be damaged.
You can store two cups, drink bottles or
beverage cans in cup holder :.
i
Clean the cup holder with a damp cloth.
Cargo compartment cover blind with
parcel net bag
This feature is only available in Canada
for the model passion.
G
WARNING
The cargo compartment cover blind is not
intended to secure heavy objects in the
event of an accident. For this reason, heavy
objects must be tied down.
12
Vehicles with air conditioning with climate control* only.
Loading and storing
107
>> Controls.
* optional
Z
Vehicle occupants could be injured by
objects being thrown around in the vehicle
in the event of
R
hard braking
R
a change of direction
R
an accident
G
WARNING
Do not place any objects on the mounted
cargo compartment cover blind.
Vehicle occupants could be injured by
objects being thrown around in the vehicle
in the event of
R
hard braking
R
a change of direction
R
an accident
G
WARNING
Only place light loads in the parcel net
bag. Do not transport heavy, sharp-edged or
fragile objects in the parcel net bag. The
parcel net bag cannot sufficiently secure
loads in an accident.
Vehicle occupants could be injured by
objects being thrown around in the vehicle
in the event of
R
hard braking
R
a change of direction
R
an accident
Observe the loading guidelines.
The cargo compartment cover blind
R
serves to protect objects that are stored
in the vehicle’s cargo compartment from
prying eyes
R
prevents smaller objects from penetrat-
ing into the passenger compartment from
the cargo compartment; however, it is not
intended to act as a load restraining
device
The parcel net bag
R
is for storing small, lightweight objects
R
prevents small objects from sliding
around inside the passenger compart-
ment
!
If objects are placed on the cargo com-
partment cover blind when mounted, the
cover may be damaged.
Fitting
If you wish to use cargo compartment cover
blind : as normal, assemble it in top
mountings ;. If you do not need the cargo
compartment cover blind, insert in bottom
mountings =.
X
Open the tailgate.
X
Secure cargo compartment cover
blind : at the front of the cargo com-
partment with the parcel net bag.
X
Insert cargo compartment cover
blind : on the right-hand side in top
mounting ; or in bottom mounting =.
108
Loading and storing
>> Controls.
X
Push handle ? to the right in the direc-
tion of the arrow.
X
Insert cargo compartment cover
blind : in top mounting ; or bottom
mounting = in the left-hand side pan-
eling and release handle ?.
X
Cargo compartment cover blind :
engages.
X
Pull parcel net bag A down slightly and
secure with the hook and loop fastener.
X
Remove in reverse order.
Controls
X
Closing: Take hold of cargo compartment
cover blind : in the middle and pull
backwards.
X
Guide cargo compartment cover
blind : into the rear right and left
mountings ;.
X
Opening: Take hold of cargo compartment
cover blind : in the middle, pull back-
wards, and remove from rear mount-
ings ;.
X
Guide cargo compartment cover
blind : into position.
Coat hooks
The coat hooks are located at the rear roof
rail on the driver’s and passenger side.
Coat hook on driver’s side
:
Coat hook
Storage compartments
G
WARNING
To help avoid personal injury during a col-
lision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when storing objects in the vehicle. Put
luggage or cargo in the cargo compartment
if possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo
higher than the seat backrests.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will
help to prevent stored objects from being
thrown about and injuring vehicle occu-
pants during
R
hard braking
R
a change of direction
R
an accident
Do not store objects under the driver’s seat.
Objects stored under the driver’s seat can
slide forward into driver’s foot well during
braking and get caught between or beneath
the pedals. This could restrict your ability
Loading and storing
109
>> Controls.
Z
to brake or accelerate and could lead to
accidents and injury.
Coin holder
The coin holder is located in front of the
gear selector lever.
Example illustration (coupé)
:
Coin holder
Door pockets
The door pockets are located in the driver’s
and passenger door.
:
Door pocket
Storage trays next to the steering wheel
The storage trays are located to the left and
right of the steering wheel.
:
Storage tray
Glove box
i
A clamp rail for slips of paper is
located on the outside of the glove box
lid.
X
Opening: Pull on glove box lid
release : and fold down the glove box
lid.
X
Closing: Lift up the glove box lid with a
bit of force until it engages.
X
Locking: Insert the key into the glove box
lock and turn it to position 3.
X
Unlocking: Insert the key into the glove
box lock and turn it to position 2.
110
Loading and storing
>> Controls.
Storage tray* in center console
X
Installing: Slide storage tray ; onto the
cones on the center console until it
engages audibly.
X
Removing: Press levers : simultane-
ously towards the storage tray.
X
Pull storage tray ; away from the center
console.
X
Opening: Pull handle =.
X
Closing: Swivel storage tray ; back
until it engages.
Parcel nets
Parcel nets are located on the in-board
sides of the seat backrests.
i
Vehicles equipped with an armrest* on
the driver’s seat, have a parcel net on the
passenger seat only.
i
Each parcel net is intended for light-
weight items of below 0.9 lb (0.4 kg).
Example illustration: Parcel net on passenger
seat
:
Parcel net
Drawer*
A drawer is located below the audio sys-
tem*
13
.
X
Opening: Press on the center of
drawer :.
The drawer opens slightly.
X
Pull drawer: to open completely.
X
Closing: Press on drawer : until it
engages.
Storage compartment in the tailgate
(coupé only)
You can store small objects in the storage
compartment in the tailgate.
13
Vehicles with audio system basic* only.
Loading and storing
111
>> Controls.
* optional
Z
X
Opening: Open the tailgates.
X
Pull handle : on the inside of the tail-
gate backward.
X
Lift up the storage compartment cover.
X
Closing: Close storage compartment
cover :.
X
Press on the “PRESS” marking in the mid-
dle of storage compartment cover :
until it engages audibly.
X
Close the tailgates (Y page 55).
Loading instructions
G
WARNING
Transport heavy or hard objects in the
cargo compartment, not in the passenger
compartment.
Always fasten items being carried as
securely as possible using fastening mate-
rials appropriate for the weight and size
of the load.
In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
den maneuvers, loose items may be thrown
around inside the vehicle, causing injury
to vehicle occupants.
G
WARNING
To help avoid personal injury during a col-
lision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when storing objects in the vehicle. Put
luggage or cargo in the cargo compartment
if possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo
higher than the seat backrests.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will
help to prevent stored objects from being
thrown about and injuring vehicle occu-
pants during
R
braking
R
vehicle maneuvers
R
an accident
G
WARNING
No racks or loads may be secured to the roof
of the vehicle, as
R
the panorama roof* may be damaged, thus
injuring persons
R
this can have a substantial adverse
effect on the driving dynamics of the
vehicle, thus causing accidents
R
the rack and/or the load could detach and
through this cause an accident or other
people could be injured by the load and/
or rack that has fallen off
G
WARNING
Make sure the tailgate is closed when the
engine is running and while driving.
Among other dangers, deadly carbon mon-
oxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior
resulting in unconsciousness and death.
G
WARNING
Do not store any flammable substances
inside the vehicle that could ignite and
start a fire.
G
WARNING
The manufacturer has not approved your
vehicle for towing a trailer. A trailer can
permanently impair driving safety.
The gross vehicle weight which is the
weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools,
installed accessories, passengers, and
luggage/cargo must never exceed the load
limit and the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) for your vehicle as specified on the
placard located on the driver’s door B‑pil-
lar (Y page 214). In addition, the load must
112
Loading and storing
>> Controls.
* optional
be distributed in such a way so that the
weight on each axle never exceeds the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and
rear axle. The GVWR and GAWR for your vehi-
cle are indicated on the certification
label which can be found on the driver’s
door B‑pillar.
For more information, see “Loading the
vehicle” (Y page 130).
The handling characteristics of a fully
loaded vehicle depend greatly on the load
distribution. It is therefore recommended
to load the vehicle with the heaviest items
being placed towards the front of the vehi-
cle.
Please pay attention to and comply with the
following instructions when loading the
vehicle and transporting cargo:
R
Always place items being carried
against seat backrests, and fasten them
as securely as possible.
R
The heaviest portion of the cargo should
always be kept as low as possible against
seat backrests.
R
Do not stack loads higher than the top
edge of the head restraints.
R
Make sure no luggage/cargo items can get
above or next to the driver’s and/or
passenger seat into the passenger com-
partment.
R
Make sure luggage/cargo is properly
secured.
R
Always use, if so equipped, cargo net*
when transporting cargo.
Do not carry any unnecessary weight in the
vehicle. This increases vehicle weight,
which results in increased energy con-
sumption.
Useful features
Sun visors
The sun visors protect you from sun glare
while driving.
Glare through the windshield
X
Swing sun visor : down.
Glare through a side window
X
Swing sun visor : down.
X
Disengage sun visor : from mount-
ing ;.
X
Pivot sun visor : to the side.
Sun screen*
The sun screen provides protection from
sun rays and from heat generated by the
panorama roof*.
The sun screen can be adjusted to any
desired position.
X
Opening or closing: Move sun screen :
forward or backward using the handle.
Useful features
113
>> Controls.
* optional
Z
Auxiliary power outlet
The auxiliary power outlet supplies power
to the following electrical accessories
when the key is turned to starter switch
position 1:
R
the cigarette lighter*, available in con-
junction with the ashtray*
R
the electric air pump, available in con-
junction with the tire repair kit*
R
other consumers which operate up to a
maximum of 60 W
!
The auxiliary power outlet can accom-
modate 12V DC electrical accessories
designed for use with the standard “cig-
arette lighter” plug type.
Keep in mind, however, that connecting
accessories to the auxiliary power outlet
(for example extensive connecting and
disconnecting, or using plugs that do not
fit properly) can damage the auxiliary
power outlet. With the auxiliary power
outlet damaged, the cigarette lighter*
may no longer be able to be placed in the
heating (pushed-in) position, or may pop
out before it is hot enough.
The auxiliary power outlet is located in the
lower center console.
Auxiliary power outlet
X
Turn the key to starter switch position 1.
!
Please observe the safety instructions
given in the respective operating
instructions.
Please note that
R
if using the auxiliary power outlet the
maximum current drawn may not exceed
5 A or 60 W
R
the electric air pump* can be connected
to the auxiliary power outlet for the time
it takes to inflate the tire without any
problem
R
the vehicle battery will discharge when
current is drawn.
114
Useful features
>> Controls.
* optional
>> Operation.
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) .............. 116
At the gas station ............................. 116
Engine compartment .......................... 117
Front compartment ........................... 120
Tires and wheels .............................. 124
Winter driving ................................ 143
Driving instructions ........................ 144
Driving abroad ................................ 151
Vehicle care ................................... 151
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
In the Operation section you will find
detailed information on operating, main-
taining and caring for your vehicle.
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle
during the break-in period, the more sat-
isfied you will be with its performance
later on.
R
Drive your vehicle during the first
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but mod-
erate vehicle and engine speeds.
R
During this period, avoid heavy loads
(full throttle driving) and excessive
engine speeds (no more than
2
/
3
of max-
imum rpm in each gear).
R
Shift gears in a timely manner.
R
Do not attempt to slow the vehicle down
by shifting to a lower gear.
R
Avoid accelerating by kickdown.
After 1000 miles (1 500 km), you may gradu-
ally increase vehicle and engine speeds to
the permissible maximum.
All of the above instructions also apply
when driving the first 1000 miles (1500 km)
after the engine has been replaced.
i
Always obey applicable speed limits.
At the gas station
Refueling
G
WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and poison-
ous. It burns violently and can cause ser-
ious personal injury.
Never allow sparks, flame or smoking mate-
rials near gasoline!
Turn off the engine before refueling.
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
inhaling fumes and skin or clothing con-
tact. Extinguish all smoking materials.
Direct skin contact with fuels and the inha-
lation of fuel vapors are damaging to your
health.
!
Do not put diesel fuel in vehicles with
gasoline engines. Do not mix gasoline
with diesel fuel. Even small quantities
of diesel fuel will damage the injection
system. Damage caused by adding diesel
fuel will not be covered by the smart
Limited Warranty.
If diesel fuel has mixed with gasoline,
do not start the engine. Otherwise the
catalytic converter will be irreparably
damaged.
Contact an authorized smart center or
Roadside Assistance immediately and
have the vehicle towed.
!
Damage resulting from mixing gasoline
with diesel fuel is not covered by the
smart Limited Warranty.
The fuel filler flap is located on the
passenger side towards the rear. Locking/
unlocking the vehicle with the key auto-
matically locks/unlocks the fuel filler
flap.
i
In case the central locking system does
not release the fuel filler flap, or the
opening mechanisms is clamping, con-
tact Roadside Assistance or an author-
ized smart center.
:
Opening the fuel filler flap
;
Inserting the fuel filler cap
=
Fuel filler cap
116
At the gas station
>> Operation.
?
Fuel type label
A
Holder
X
Turn off the engine.
X
Remove the key from the starter switch.
X
Open the fuel filler flap by pulling at the
point indicated by arrow :.
X
Turn fuel filler cap = counterclockwise
and hold on to it until possible pressure
is released.
X
Take off fuel filler cap =.
!
The fuel filler cap is tethered to the
fuel filler flap. Do not drop the fuel
filler cap. It could damage the vehicle
paint finish.
X
Insert fuel filler cap = in direction of
arrow ; into holder A on the inside of
the fuel filler flap.
X
Fully insert filler nozzle unit and
refuel.
X
Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
unit cuts out — do not top off or overfill.
G
WARNING
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create
pressure in the system which could cause a
gas discharge. This could cause the gas to
spray back out when removing the fuel pump
nozzle, which could cause personal injury.
X
Replace fuel filler cap =.
X
Turn fuel filler cap = clockwise until
the handle grip overturns.
i
Make sure to close the fuel filler flap
before locking the vehicle as the fuel
filler flap locking pin prevents closing
after you have locked the vehicle.
X
Close the fuel filler flap.
You should hear the latch close shut.
i
Only use premium unleaded gasoline
with a minimum Posted Octane Rating of
91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON). Informa-
tion on gasoline quality can normally be
found on the fuel pump. Please contact
gas station personnel in case labels on
the pump cannot be found.
For more information on gasoline, see
“Premium unleaded gasoline”
(Y page 221) and “Fuel requirements”
(Y page 221), or contact an authorized
smart center.
Check regularly and before a long trip
For information on quantities and
requirements of operating agents, see
“Service fluids and capacities”
(Y page 218).
Check the following:
R
Engine oil level (Y page 118)
R
Tire inflation pressure (Y page 127)
R
Coolant level (Y page 122)
R
Vehicle lighting (Y page 178)
R
Windshield washer system (Y page 123)
R
Brake fluid (Y page 124)
Engine compartment
Engine compartment cover
Open the engine compartment cover to
check the engine oil level and if necessary,
to add engine oil.
G
WARNING
High outside temperature, stop-and-go
traffic, driving on long uphill grades or
driving at high engine speed may increase
the temperature in the engine compart-
ment. Therefore, the engine compartment
cover and parts in the area around the
engine compartment cover may be hot. Parts
of the engine can become very hot. To pre-
vent burns, let the engine cool off com-
pletely before touching the engine com-
partment cover, parts in the area around the
engine compartment cover, and parts of the
engine.
Engine compartment
117
>> Operation.
Z
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Move the gear selector lever to park
position P.
X
Switch off the ignition.
X
Open the tailgate.
G
WARNING
Exercise extreme caution if you see flames
or smoke coming from the engine compart-
ment. Move away from the vehicle and call
the fire department.
If the coolant temperature warning lamp
indicates that the engine is overheated, do
not attempt to open the engine compartment
cover. Move away from the vehicle and wait
until the engine has cooled before opening
the engine compartment.
G
WARNING
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear
of moving parts when the engine compart-
ment cover is open and the engine is run-
ning.
G
WARNING
The engine is equipped with a transistor-
ized ignition system that utilizes high
voltage. Do not touch any components (igni-
tion coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
socket) of the ignition system
R
while the engine is running
R
while starting the engine
R
if ignition is “on” and the engine is
turned manually
X
Opening: Grasp the strap on cargo com-
partment floor ;.
X
Lift cargo compartment floor ; with the
strap.
X
Engage hook ? into top mounting = of
cargo compartment cover blind A.
X
Remove fastening screw :.
X
Remove engine compartment cover A.
X
Closing: Slide engine compartment cover
A forward into the tabs provided.
X
Tighten fastening screw :.
X
Disengage hook ? from top mounting
=.
X
Fold cargo compartment floor ; back
down.
X
Push the right hand and left hand cargo
compartment floor edges under the edges
of the side panels.
X
Close the tailgate.
Engine oil
The amount of oil your engine needs will
depend on a number of factors, including
driving style. Increased oil consumption
can occur when the vehicle is new or the
vehicle is driven at higher engine speeds
frequently.
Engine oil consumption checks should only
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
!
Do not use any special lubricant addi-
tives, as these may increase wear and
damage the drive assemblies. Using spe-
cial additives not approved by smart may
cause damage not covered by the smart
Limited Warranty. More information on
this subject is available at any smart
center.
Checking engine oil level
!
Check the engine oil level at regular
intervals.
118
Engine compartment
>> Operation.
When checking the engine oil level
R
the vehicle must be parked on level
ground
R
the vehicle must have been stationary for
at least five minutes with the engine
turned off
X
Turn off the engine.
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Open the tailgate.
X
Open the engine compartment cover
(Y page 117).
The oil dipstick is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger side.
X
Pull out oil dipstick :.
X
Wipe oil dipstick : clean with a clean
cloth.
X
Fully insert oil dipstick : into the
dipstick guide tube.
X
Pull out oil dipstick : again after
approximately one minute to obtain
accurate reading.
The oil level is correct when it is
between lower mark = (minimum) and
upper mark ; (maximum) on both sides
of oil dipstick :.
X
Fully insert oil dipstick : into the
dipstick guide tube again.
X
If necessary, add engine oil
(Y page 119).
i
The filling quantity between the upper
and lower marks on the oil dipstick is
approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 l).
Adding engine oil
!
Only use approved engine oils and oil
filters required for vehicles with Main-
tenance System. For a listing of approved
engine oils and oil filters contact an
authorized smart center.
Using engine oils and oil filters of
specification other than those expressly
required for the Maintenance System, or
changing of oil and oil filter at change
intervals longer than those called for by
the Maintenance System will result in
engine or emission control system dam-
age not covered by the smart Limited
Warranty.
G
WARNING
When adding engine oil, always use a funnel
to avoid spilling oil on any hot parts such
as the catalytic converter or exhaust sys-
tem.
If this should happen, however, the engine
must be thoroughly cleaned before you con-
tinue your trip. The engine oil could oth-
erwise ignite.
The filler cap is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger side.
X
Unscrew filler cap : from the filler
neck.
X
Add engine oil as required.
Do not add more than 0.53 US qt (0.5 l)
engine oil at a time.
X
Wait one minute until the engine oil has
run into the oil pan.
Engine compartment
119
>> Operation.
Z
X
Check the engine oil level once more.
X
Add engine oil once more if necessary.
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding
to avoid environmental damage caused by
oil entering the ground and water.
!
Excess engine oil must be siphoned or
drained off. It could cause damage to the
engine or emission control system not
covered by the smart Limited Warranty.
X
Screw filler cap : back on the filler
neck.
X
Close the engine compartment cover
(Y page 117).
Front compartment
Service flap
Remove the service flap to check the cool-
ant level, windshield washer reservoir
level, and brake fluid level.
Insert the service flap on the front of the
vehicle so that it does not get damaged or
dirty.
i
The service flap has a strap on the rear
side that ties it to the vehicle body.
G
WARNING
Always turn the key to starter switch posi-
tion 0 and remove the key from the starter
switch before opening the service flap.
If the windshield wipers should inadver-
tently be switched on, you could be ser-
iously injured by the wiper washer drive,
which is located just below the service
flap.
G
WARNING
Make sure the service flap is locked while
driving. Otherwise, the service flap could
become detached and pose a hazard to you
or others.
G
WARNING
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear
of moving parts when the service flap is
open.
The radiator fan may continue to run for
approximately 30 seconds or may even
restart after the engine has been turned
off. Stay clear of fan blades.
!
Check the fill levels at regular inter-
vals.
!
Carefully remove ice, snow, and any
other deposits from the air intake
grilles above the service flap to ensure
air intake at all times.
X
Park the vehicle on level ground.
X
Turn off the engine.
X
Engage the parking brake.
Removing
X
Using a suitable object, push both open-
ers : towards the inside in direction of
the arrows.
Both levers ; are released from the
radiator grille.
X
Pull both levers ; forward in direction
of the arrows.
120
Front compartment
>> Operation.
X
Pull both levers ; fully towards the out-
side in the direction of the arrows.
X
Lift the front of service flap =.
X
First pull service flap = forward
slightly and then remove it upwards as
indicated by arrow ?.
X
Insert hooks A on the back of service
flap = into openings B.
Remounting
X
Lift service flap = out of openings B.
X
Insert left and right links D of service
flap = under links C on the fender.
X
Insert both tabs E on the back of service
flap = completely into openings F.
Front compartment
121
>> Operation.
Z
X
Push service flap = down in direction
of arrow G.
X
First push both levers ; inward and then
to the rear.
X
Press both levers ; into the radiator
grille until they engage.
Coolant
G
WARNING
In order to avoid potentially serious burns:
R
Use extreme caution when opening the
service flap if there are any signs of
steam or coolant leaking from the cool-
ing system, or if the coolant temperature
warning lamp ? in the instrument
cluster indicates that the coolant is
overheated.
R
Do not remove the pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if coolant temperature is
above 158¦ (70¥). Allow engine to cool
down before removing cap. The coolant
reservoir contains hot fluid and is under
pressure.
R
Using a rag, slowly turn the cap approx-
imately
1
/
2
turn to relieve excess pres-
sure. If opened immediately, scalding
hot fluid and steam will be blown out
under pressure.
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check the
coolant level the vehicle must be parked on
level ground and the engine must have
cooled down. For more information, see
“Coolants” (Y page 223).
Checking coolant level
X
Remove the service flap and insert it on
the front of the vehicle (Y page 120).
The coolant reservoir is located in the
front compartment on the driver’s side.
X
Allow the radiator to cool down for at
least 30 minutes.
X
Using a rag, slowly turn pressure
cap : approximately
1
/
2
turn counter-
122
Front compartment
>> Operation.
clockwise to release any excess pres-
sure.
X
Continue turning pressure cap : coun-
terclockwise and remove it.
The coolant level is correct if the level
R
for cold coolant: reaches marking
bar ; visible through the filling
opening
R
for warm coolant: is approximately
0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher
X
If necessary, add coolant.
Adding coolant
X
Add coolant as required. The coolant
level may not exceed the maximum filling
level.
X
Replace and tighten pressure cap :.
X
Remount the service flap and close it
(Y page 120).
Windshield/rear window washer system
Both the windshield and the rear window
14
washer are supplied from the windshield
washer reservoir.
The recommended minimum filling level is
1.06 US qt (1.0 l).
X
Remove the service flap and insert it on
the front of the vehicle (Y page 120).
The windshield washer reservoir is located
in the front compartment on the driver’s
side.
G
WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate is highly
flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking
are prohibited when windshield washer
concentrate is being handled.
X
Use a windshield washer concentrate
labeled for summer and water for tem-
peratures above freezing point.
X
Use a windshield washer concentrate
labeled for winter and water for temper-
atures below freezing point.
!
Always use a windshield washer concen-
trate labeled for winter where tempera-
tures may fall below freezing point.
Failure to do so could result in damage
to the washer system/reservoir.
X
Premix the windshield washer fluid in a
suitable container.
Observe mixing ratios depending on the
outside temperature (Y page 222).
X
Use the tab to pull cap : upwards.
X
Refill the windshield washer reservoir.
X
Push cap : onto the windshield washer
reservoir.
X
Remount the service flap and close it
(Y page 120).
14
Coupé only.
Front compartment
123
>> Operation.
Z
Brake fluid
G
WARNING
During vehicle operation, the boiling
point of the brake fluid is continuously
reduced through the absorption of moisture
from the atmosphere. Under extremely
strenuous operating conditions, this mois-
ture content can lead to the formation of
bubbles in the system, thus reducing the
system’s efficiency.
Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced
regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s Mainte-
nance Booklet for replacement interval.
The brake fluid level in the brake fluid
reservoir may be too low if the brake warn-
ing lamp in the instrument cluster comes
on (Y page 21) although the parking brake
is released.
!
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the brake
system checked for brake pad thickness
and leaks immediately. Contact an
authorized smart center immediately. Do
not add brake fluid as this will not solve
the problem.
X
Remove the service flap and insert it on
the front of the vehicle (Y page 120).
The brake fluid reservoir is located in the
front compartment on the passenger side.
Checking brake fluid level
X
Perform a visual check of the brake fluid
reservoir :.
The brake fluid level is correct when it
is between the minimum mark and the
maximum mark.
R
If the brake fluid level has fallen
slightly below the minimum mark,
drive to an authorized smart center.
R
If the brake fluid level has fallen sig-
nificantly below the minimum mark,
call Roadside Assistance or an author-
ized smart center.
X
Remount the service flap and close it
(Y page 120).
Tires and wheels
Safety notes
Contact an authorized smart center for
information on tested and recommended
rims and tires for summer and winter oper-
ation. They can also offer advice concern-
ing tire service and purchase.
G
WARNING
Replace rims or tires with the same desig-
nation, manufacturer and type as shown on
the original part. For further information
contact an authorized smart center. If
incorrectly sized rims and tires are
mounted, the wheel brakes or suspension
components can be damaged. Also, the oper-
ating clearance of the wheels and the tires
may no longer be correct.
G
WARNING
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is worn to minimum tread depth,
or if the tires have sustained damage,
replace them.
When replacing rims, only use genuine
smart wheel bolts specified for the partic-
ular rim type. Failure to do so can result in
124
Tires and wheels
>> Operation.
the bolts loosening and possibly an acci-
dent.
Retreaded tires are not tested or recom-
mended by smart, since previous damage
cannot always be recognized on retreads.
The operating safety of the vehicle cannot
be assured when such tires are used.
G
WARNING
If you feel a sudden significant vibration
or ride disturbance, or you suspect that
possible damage to your vehicle has occur-
red, you should turn on the hazard warning
flashers, carefully slow down, and drive
with caution to an area which is a safe dis-
tance from the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest authorized smart center or tire
dealer for repairs.
G
WARNING
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire
affects the ability to steer or brake the
vehicle. You could lose control of the vehi-
cle. Continued driving with a flat tire or
driving at high speed with a flat tire will
cause excessive heat build-up and possibly
a fire.
Modifications to the brake system and
wheels and the use of brake dust rings are
not permissible.
Important guidelines
R
Only use sets of tires and rims of the same
type and make.
R
Tires must be of the correct size for the
rim.
R
Break in new tires for approximately
60 miles (100 km) at moderate speeds.
R
Regularly check the tires and rims for
damage. Dented or bent rims can cause
tire pressure loss and damage to the tire
beads.
R
If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
inflation pressure and correct as
required.
R
Do not allow your tires to wear down too
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are
sharply reduced at tread depths of less
than
1
/
8
in (3 mm).
Recommended tire inflation pressure
G
WARNING
Follow recommended tire inflation pres-
sures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated
tires wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel econ-
omy, and are more likely to fail from being
overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated
tires can adversely affect handling and
ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase
stopping distance, and result in sudden
deflation (blowout) because they are more
likely to become punctured or damaged by
road debris, potholes etc.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the
Tire and Loading Information placard on
the driver’s door B‑pillar. Overloading the
tires can overheat them, possibly causing
a blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and
Loading Information placard located on
the driver’s door B‑pillar (Y page 130).
The tire inflation pressure should be
checked regularly. Only adjust the tire
inflation pressure on cold tires. The tires
can be considered cold if the vehicle has
been parked for at least 3 hours or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Depending on the
ambient temperature, the driving speed
Tires and wheels
125
>> Operation.
Z
and the tire load, the tire temperature
changes. When the tire temperature
changes by 18¦ (10¥), the tire inflation
pressure will change by approximately
10 kpa (0.1 bar, 1.5 psi). Keep this in mind
when checking tire inflation pressure on
warm tires and adjust the tire pressure
only if the tire inflation pressure is too
low for the current operating conditions.
If you check the tire inflation pressure
when the tires are warm, the reading will
be higher than the cold reading. This is
normal. Do not let air out to match the
specified cold tire inflation pressure.
Otherwise, the tire will be underinflated.
Follow recommended cold tire inflation
pressures listed on Tire and Loading
Information placard on the driver’s door
B‑pillar.
Keeping the tires properly inflated pro-
vides the best handling, tread life and rid-
ing comfort.
In addition to the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard on the driver’s door B‑pil-
lar, also consult the tire inflation pres-
sure label (if available) on the inside of
the filler flap for any additional informa-
tion pertaining to special driving situa-
tions. For more information, see “Impor-
tant notes on tire inflation pressure”
(Y page 126).
i
Data shown on Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard example are for illus-
tration purposes only. Tire data are spe-
cific to each vehicle and may vary from
data shown in the following illustration.
Refer to Tire and Loading Information
placard on vehicle for actual data spe-
cific to your vehicle.
The Tire and Loading Information placard
lists the recommended cold tire inflation
pressures : for maximum loaded vehicle
weight. The tire inflation pressures listed
apply to the tires installed as original
equipment.
Important notes on tire inflation pres-
sure
G
WARNING
If the tire inflation pressure drops repeat-
edly, check the tires for punctures from
foreign objects and/or whether air is leak-
ing from the valves or from around the rim.
Tire temperature and tire inflation pres-
sure are also increased while driving,
depending on the driving speed and the
tire load.
Potential problems associated with
underinflated and overinflated tires
Underinflated tires
G
WARNING
Follow recommended tire inflation pres-
sures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated
tires wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel econ-
omy, and are more likely to fail from being
overheated.
126
Tires and wheels
>> Operation.
Underinflated tires can
R
cause excessive and uneven tire wear
R
adversely affect fuel economy
R
lead to tire failure from being over-
heated
R
adversely affect handling characteris-
tics
Overinflated tires
G
WARNING
Follow recommended tire inflation pres-
sures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated
tires can adversely affect handling and
ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase
stopping distance, and result in sudden
deflation (blowout) because they are more
likely to become punctured or damaged by
road debris, potholes etc.
Overinflated tires can
R
adversely affect handling characteris-
tics
R
cause uneven tire wear
R
be more prone to damage from road haz-
ards
R
adversely affect ride comfort
R
increase stopping distance
Checking tire inflation pressure
Safety notes
G
WARNING
Follow recommended tire inflation pres-
sures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated
tires wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel econ-
omy, and are more likely to fail from being
overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated
tires can adversely affect handling and
ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase
stopping distance, and result in sudden
deflation (blowout) because they are more
likely to become punctured or damaged by
road debris, potholes etc.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the
Tire and Loading Information placard on
the driver’s door B‑pillar. Overloading the
tires can overheat them, possibly causing
a blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
Check the tire inflation pressure at least
once a month.
Check and adjust the tire inflation pres-
sure when the tires are cold (Y page 125).
Checking tire inflation pressure man-
ually
Follow the steps below to achieve correct
tire inflation pressure:
X
Remove the cap from the valve on one tire.
X
Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.
X
Read the tire inflation pressure on tire
gauge and check against the recom-
mended tire inflation pressure on the
Tire and Loading Information placard on
the driver’s door B‑pillar (Y page 130).
If necessary, add air to achieve the rec-
ommended tire inflation pressure.
X
If you have overfilled the tire, release
tire inflation pressure by pushing the
metal stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of
a pen. Then recheck the tire inflation
pressure with the tire gauge.
X
Install the valve cap.
X
Repeat this procedure for each tire.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)*
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).
Tires and wheels
127
>> Operation.
* optional
Z
It monitors the tire inflation pressure in
all four tires. A warning is issued to alert
you to a decrease in pressure in one or more
of the tires.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) is equipped with a combination low
tire pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale in
the instrument cluster. Depending on how
the telltale illuminates, it indicates a low
tire pressure condition or a malfunction in
the TPMS system itself:
R
If the telltale illuminates continuously,
one or more of your tires is significantly
underinflated. There is no malfunction
in the TPMS.
R
If the telltale flashes for 60 seconds and
then stays illuminated, the TPMS system
itself is not operating properly.
The TPMS only functions on wheels that are
equipped with the proper electronic sen-
sors.
G
WARNING
The TPMS does not indicate a warning for
wrongly selected inflation pressures.
Always adjust tire inflation pressure
according to the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard on the driver’s door B‑pil-
lar.
The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due
to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g.
tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In
this case bring the vehicle to a halt by
carefully applying the brakes and avoiding
abrupt steering maneuvers.
G
WARNING
Each tire should be checked monthly when
cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard. If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the Tire and
Loading Information placard, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pres-
sure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure moni-
toring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale when one or more of
your tires is significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driv-
ing on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping abil-
ity. Please note that the TPMS is not a sub-
stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it
is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if underinfla-
tion has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately
1 minute and then remain continuously
illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-
function exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of
incompatible replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
128
Tires and wheels
>> Operation.
or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
i
If a condition causing the TPMS to mal-
function develops, it may take up to
10 minutes for the system to signal a mal-
function using the TPMS telltale flash-
ing and illumination sequence.
The telltale extinguishes after a few
minutes driving if the malfunction has
been corrected.
i
Operating radio transmission equip-
ment (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way
radios) in or near the vehicle could
cause the TPMS to malfunction.
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
R
This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
R
this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS‑210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
R
This device may not cause interfer-
ence, and
R
this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Restarting the TPMS
G
WARNING
It is the driver’s responsibility to cali-
brate the TPMS on the recommended cold
inflation pressure. Underinflated tires
affect the ability to steer or brake and
might cause you to lose control of the vehi-
cle.
When you restart the TPMS, the system sets
new reference values for each tire.
The TPMS must be restarted when you have
adjusted the tire inflation pressure to a
new level (e.g. because of different load or
driving conditions). The TPMS is then
recalibrated to the current tire inflation
pressures.
X
Using the Tire and Loading Information
placard on the driver’s door B‑pillar
(Y page 130), make sure the tire infla-
tion pressure of all four tires is correct.
i
Restart the TPMS after adjusting the
tire inflation pressure to the inflation
pressure recommended for the vehicle
operating condition. Tire pressure
should only be adjusted on cold tires.
Observe the recommended tire inflation
pressure on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard on the driver’s door
B‑pillar (Y page 130).
X
Press Restarting TPMS button :.
The combination low tire pressure/TPMS
malfunction telltale in the instrument
cluster (Y page 21) flashes for approx-
imately 5 seconds and then goes out.
Tires and wheels
129
>> Operation.
Z
After driving a few minutes the system
verifies that the current tire inflation
pressures are within the system’s speci-
fied range. Afterwards the current tire
inflation pressures are accepted as refer-
ence pressures and then monitored.
Maximum tire inflation pressure
G
WARNING
Never exceed the max. tire inflation pres-
sure. Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated
tires wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel econ-
omy, and are more likely to fail from being
overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated
tires can adversely affect handling and
ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase
stopping distance, and result in sudden
deflation (blowout) because they are more
likely to become punctured or damaged by
road debris, potholes etc.
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle
and may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
This is the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure : for the tire.
Always follow the recommended tire infla-
tion pressure (Y page 125) for proper tire
inflation.
Loading the vehicle
Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry.
1) The Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard can be found on the driver’s door
B‑pillar. This placard tells you impor-
tant information about the number of
people that can be in the vehicle and
the total weight that can be carried in
the vehicle. It also contains informa-
tion on the proper size and recom-
mended tire inflation pressures for the
original equipment tires on your vehi-
cle.
2) The certification label, also found on
the driver’s door B‑pillar, tells you
about the gross weight capacity of your
vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR
includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel and cargo. The certif-
ication label also tells you about the
front and rear axle weight capacity,
called the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR). The GAWR is the total allowable
weight that can be carried by a single
axle (front or rear). Never exceed the
GVWR or GAWR for either the front axle
or rear axle.
:
Driver’s door B‑pillar
Following is a discussion on how to work
with the information contained on the Tire
and Loading Information placard with
regards to loading your vehicle.
130
Tires and wheels
>> Operation.
Tire and Loading Information
G
WARNING
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the
Tire and Loading Information placard on
the driver’s door B‑pillar. Overloading the
tires can overheat them, possibly causing
a blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
Tire and Loading Information placard
i
Data shown on Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard example are for illus-
tration purposes only. Load limit data
are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in the following illus-
tration. Refer to Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard on vehicle for actual data
specific to your vehicle.
The Tire and Loading Information placard
showing load limit information : is
located on the driver’s door B‑pillar
(Y page 130).
X
Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXXX kg or XXXX lbs.” on the
Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of all occupants and
cargo/luggage should never exceed the
weight referenced in that statement.
Seating capacity
The seating capacity gives you important
information on the number of occupants
that can be in the vehicle. The Tire and
Loading Information placard showing
seating capacity : is located on the
driver’s door B‑pillar (Y page 130).
i
Data shown on Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard example are for illus-
tration purposes only. Seating capacity
data are specific to each vehicle and may
vary from data shown in the following
illustration. Refer to Tire and Loading
Information placard on vehicle for
actual data specific to your vehicle.
Steps for determining correct load limit
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under
Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations,
Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic
and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
X
Step 1: Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXXX kg or
XXXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s Tire and
Loading Information placard.
X
Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passenger that will be
riding in your vehicle.
X
Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passenger from XXXX kilo-
grams or XXXX lbs.
X
Step 4: The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
Tires and wheels
131
>> Operation.
Z
load capacity. For example, if the “XXXX”
amount equals 540 lbs and there will be
one 150 lbs passenger in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 390 lbs
(540 lbs - 150 lbs = 390 lbs).
X
Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in step 4.
i
The maximum cargo compartment load
is 110 lbs (50 kg).
The following table shows examples on how
to calculate total and cargo load capaci-
ties with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. The fol-
lowing examples use a load limit of 540 lbs.
This is for illustration purposes only.
Make sure you are using the actual load
limit for your vehicle stated on the vehi-
cle’s Tire and Loading Information placard
(Y page 131).
The higher the weight of all occupants, the
less cargo and luggage load capacity is
available.
132
Tires and wheels
>> Operation.
Examples for steps 1 to 3
Example 1 Example 2
Step 1 Combined weight limit of occu-
pants and cargo from Tire and Load-
ing Information placard
540 lbs 540 lbs
Step 2 Number of occupants (driver and
passenger)
2 1
Occupants weight
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
Occupant 2: 180 lbs
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
Combined weight of all occupants
330 lbs 150 lbs
Step 3 Available cargo weight (total load
limit from Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard minus combined
weight of all occupants)
540 lbs - 330 lbs =
210 lbs
540 lbs - 150 lbs =
390 lbs
Certification label
Even after careful determination of the
combined weight of all occupants and cargo
as to not exceed the permissible load
limit, you must make sure your vehicle
never exceeds the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear
axle. You can obtain the GVWR and GAWR
from the certification label. The certifi-
cation label can be found on the driver’s
door B‑pillar, see “Technical data”
(Y page 214).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) means:
The total weight of the vehicle, all occu-
pants, and all cargo must never exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) means:
The total allowable weight that can be car-
ried by a single axle (front or rear).
To assure that your vehicle does not exceed
the maximum permissible weight limits
(GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle),
have the loaded vehicle (including driver,
passenger, and all cargo) weighed on a
suitable commercial scale.
Maximum tire load
G
WARNING
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the
Tire and Loading Information placard on
the driver’s door B‑pillar. Overloading the
tires can overheat them, possibly causing
a blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle
and may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
The maximum tire load : is the maximum
weight the tires are designed to support.
Tires and wheels
133
>> Operation.
Z
For more information on tire load rating
(Y page 137).
For information on calculating total and
cargo load capacities (Y page 131).
Direction of rotation
Unidirectional tires offer added advan-
tages, such as better hydroplaning per-
formance. To benefit, however, you must
make sure the tires rotate in the direction
specified.
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the
intended direction of rotation (spinning)
of the tire.
Tire care and maintenance
G
WARNING
Regularly check the tires for damage. Dam-
aged tires can cause tire inflation pres-
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control
of your vehicle.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
Check the tire inflation pressure at least
once a month. For more information on
checking tire inflation pressure, see
“Recommended tire inflation pressure”
(Y page 125).
Tire inspection
Every time you check the tire inflation
pressure, you should also inspect your
tires for the following
R
excessive treadwear (Y page 134)
R
cord or fabric showing through the tire’s
rubber
R
bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in
the tread or side of the tire
Replace the tire if you find any of the above
conditions.
Life of tire
G
WARNING
Tires should be replaced after 6 years,
regardless of the remaining tread.
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including but not limited
to
R
driving style
R
tire inflation pressure
R
distance driven
Tread depth
G
WARNING
Although the applicable federal motor
vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be
worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI)
become visible at approximately
1
/
16
in
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow
your tires to wear down to that level. As
tread depth approaches
1
/
8
in (3 mm), the
adhesion properties on a wet road are
sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction var-
ies widely.
Do not allow your tires to wear down too far.
Adhesion properties on wet roads are
sharply reduced at tread depths of less
than
1
/
8
in (3 mm).
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and
become visible at a tread depth of approx-
imately
1
/
16
in (1.6 mm), at which point the
tire is considered worn and should be
replaced.
Recommended minimum tire tread depth:
Summer tires
1
/
8
in (3 mm)
Winter tires
1
/
6
in (4 mm)
134
Tires and wheels
>> Operation.
Treadwear indicator : appears as a solid
band across the tread.
Storing tires
!
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry
place with as little exposure to light as
possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease and fuels.
Cleaning tires
!
Never use a round nozzle to power wash
tires. The intense jet of water can result
in damage to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-
ards
The Uniform Tire Quality Grading is a U.S.
Government requirement designed to give
drivers consistent and reliable informa-
tion regarding tire performance. Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors: tread-
wear :, traction ;, and temperature
resistance =. Although not a Government
of Canada requirement, all tires made for
sale in North America have these grades
branded on the sidewall.
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle
and may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
Quality grades can be found, where appli-
cable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear Traction Temperature
200 AA A
All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-
ing based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified U.S. government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1
1
/
2
) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving hab-
its, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction
G
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Tires and wheels
135
>> Operation.
Z
The traction grades, from highest to low-
est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades rep-
resent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
Temperature
G
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination,
can cause excessive heat build-up and pos-
sible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under control-
led conditions on a specified indoor lab-
oratory test wheel. Sustained high temper-
ature can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of perform-
ance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Rotating tires
G
WARNING
Do not rotate front and rear wheels as they
have different dimensions, e.g. rim size,
wheel offset etc. Otherwise, the handling
can be affected and you could endanger
yourself and others.
Thoroughly clean the mounting face of the
wheels and brake discs, i.e. the inner side
of the wheels/tires each time the wheels/
tires are changed. Check for and ensure
proper tire inflation pressure.
G
WARNING
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
loose if not tightened with a torque of
81 lb‑ft (110 Nm).
Only use genuine smart wheel bolts speci-
fied for your vehicle’s rims.
For information on wheel change, see “Flat
tire” (Y page 186).
Tire labeling
Besides tire name (sales designation) and
manufacturer name, a number of markings
can be found on a tire.
Following are some explanations for the
markings on your vehicle’s tires:
:
Uniform Quality Grading Standards
(Y page 135)
;
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
(Y page 139)
=
Maximum tire load (Y page 133)
?
Maximum tire inflation pressure
(Y page 130)
136
Tires and wheels
>> Operation.
A
Manufacturer
B
Tire ply material (Y page 140)
C
Tire size designation, load and speed
rating (Y page 137)
D
Load identification (Y page 139)
E
Tire name
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle
and may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
For more information, see “Rims and
tires” (Y page 216).
Tire size designation, load and speed
rating
:
Tire width
;
Aspect ratio in %
=
Radial tire code
?
Rim diameter
A
Tire load rating
B
Tire speed rating
i
For information purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle
and may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
General:
Depending on the design standards used,
the tire size molded into the sidewall may
have no letter or a letter preceding the tire
size designation.
No letter preceding the size designation
(as illustrated above): Passenger car tire
based on European design standards.
Letter “P” preceding the size designation:
Passenger car tire based on U.S. design
standards.
Letter “LT” preceding the size designa-
tion: Light Truck tire based on U.S. design
standards.
Letter “T” preceding the size designation:
Temporary spare tires which are high pres-
sure compact spares designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only.
Tire width
Tire width : indicates the nominal tire
width in mm.
Aspect ratio
Aspect ratio ; is the dimensional rela-
tionship between tire section height and
section width and is expressed as a per-
centage. The aspect ratio is arrived at by
dividing section height by section width.
Tire code
Tire code = indicates the tire construc-
tion type. The “R” stands for radial tire
type. Letter “D” means diagonal or bias ply
construction; letter “B” means belted-bias
ply construction.
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
with a speed capability above 149 mph
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18).
For additional information, see “Tire
speed rating” (Y page 138).
Rim diameter
Rim diameter ? is the diameter of the
bead seat, not the diameter of the rim edge.
Rim diameter is indicated in inches (in).
Tire load rating
G
WARNING
The tire load rating must always be at least
half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Otherwise,
Tires and wheels
137
>> Operation.
Z
tire failure may result and cause an acci-
dent and/or serious personal injury to you
or others.
Always replace rims and tires with the same
designation, manufacturer and type as
shown on the original part.
G
WARNING
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the
Tire and Loading Information placard on
the driver’s door B‑pillar. Overloading the
tires can overheat them, possibly causing
a blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
Tire load rating A is a numerical code
associated with the maximum load a tire
can support.
For example, a load rating of 91 corre-
sponds to a maximum load of 1356 lbs
(615 kg) the tire is designed to support.
See also “Maximum tire load” (Y page 133)
where the maximum load associated with
the load index is indicated in kilograms
and lbs.
For additional information on tire load
rating, see “Load identification”
(Y page 139).
Tire speed rating
G
WARNING
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi-
mum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire fail-
ure, causing loss of vehicle control and
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent
driving speeds appropriate to prevailing
conditions.
Tire speed rating B indicates the
approved maximum speed for the tire.
Summer tires
Index Speed rating
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...Y above 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...(Y) above 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR above 149 mph (240 km/h)
R
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any
tire with a speed capability above
149 mph (240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in
the size designation (for example:
245/40 ZR18). To determine the maximum
speed capability of the tire, the service
description for the tire must be referred
to.
The service description is comprised of
tire load rating A and tire speed rating
B.
If your tire includes “ZR” in the size
designation and no service description
is given, the tire manufacturer must be
consulted for the maximum speed capa-
bility.
If a service description is given, the
speed capability is limited by the speed
symbol in the service description.
Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y.
In this example, “97Y” is the service
description. The letter “Y” designates
the speed rating and the speed capabil-
138
Tires and wheels
>> Operation.
ity of the tire is limited to 186 mph
(300 km/h).
R
Any tire with a speed capability above
186 mph (300 km/h) must include a “ZR” in
the size designation AND the service
description must be placed in parenthe-
sis. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y). The “(Y)”
speed rating in parenthesis designates
the maximum speed capability of the tire
as being above 186 mph (300 km/h). Con-
sult the tire manufacturer for the actual
maximum permissible speed of the tire.
All-season and winter tires
Index Speed rating
Q M+S
15
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T M+S
15
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H M+S
15
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S
15
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
i
Not all M+S rated tires provide special
winter performance. Make sure the tires
you use show M+S and the mountain/snow-
flake marking i on the tire sidewall.
These tires meet specific snow traction
performance requirements of the Rubber
Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the
Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) and
have been designed specifically for use
in snow conditions.
Load identification
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle
and may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
In addition to the tire load rating, special
load identification : may be molded into
the tire sidewall following the letter des-
ignating the tire speed rating B
(Y page 138).
No specification given: absence of any text
(like in above example) indicates a stand-
ard load (SL) tire.
XL or Extra Load: designates an extra load
(or reinforced) tire.
Light Load: designates a light load tire.
C, D, E: designates load range associated
with the maximum load a tire can carry at a
specified pressure.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
U.S. tire regulations require each new tire
manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a
TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire
produced.
15
or M+S i for winter tires.
Tires and wheels
139
>> Operation.
Z
The TIN is a unique identifier which facil-
itates efforts by tire manufactures to
notify purchasers in recall situations or
other safety matters concerning tires and
gives purchasers the means to easily iden-
tify such tires.
The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s
identification mark” ;, “Tire size” =,
“Tire type code” ?, and “Date of manufac-
ture” A.
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle
and may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
DOT (Department of Transportation)
Tire branding symbol : which denotes the
tire meets requirements of the U.S. Depart-
ment of Transportation.
Manufacturer’s identification mark
Manufacturer’s identification mark ;
denotes the tire manufacturer.
New tires have a mark with two symbols.
Retreaded tires have a mark with four sym-
bols. For more information on retreaded
tires (Y page 124).
Tire size
Code = indicates the tire size.
Tire type code
Tire type code ? may, at the option of the
manufacturer, be used as a descriptive
code for identifying significant charac-
teristics of the tire.
Date of manufacture
Date of manufacture A identifies the week
and year of manufacture.
The first two figures identify the week,
starting with “01” to represent the first
full week of the calendar year. The second
two figures represent the year.
For example, “3202” represents the 32nd
week of 2002.
Tire ply material
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle
and may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
This marking tells you about the type of
cord and number of plies in the side-
wall : and under the tread ;.
Tire and loading terminology
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those
standard items which may be replaced) of
automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats,
140
Tires and wheels
>> Operation.
radio, and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-installed
equipment (whether installed or not).
Air pressure
The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air
pressure is expressed in pounds per square
inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or bars.
Aspect ratio
Dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width expressed
in percentage.
Bar
Another metric unit for air pressure. There
are 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to
1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to
1 bar.
Bead
The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the
rim.
Cold tire inflation pressure
Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle
has been sitting for at least 3 hours or
driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard
equipment including the maximum capa-
city of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so
equipped, air conditioning and additional
optional equipment, but without passen-
gers and cargo.
DOT (Department of Transportation)
A tire branding symbol which denotes the
tire meets requirements of the U.S. Depart-
ment of Transportation.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle
weight. The gross vehicle weight on each
axle must never exceed the GAWR for the
front and rear axle indicated on the cer-
tification label located on the driver’s
door B‑pillar.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The GVW comprises the weight of the vehi-
cle including fuel, tools, installed acces-
sories, passengers and cargo. The GVW must
never exceed the GVWR indicated on the
certification label located on the driver’s
door B‑pillar.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
This is the maximum permissible vehicle
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight
of the vehicle including all options, pas-
sengers, fuel, and cargo. It is indicated on
certification label located on the driver’s
door B‑pillar.
Kilopascal (kPa)
The metric unit for air pressure. There are
6.9 kPa to 1 psi; another metric unit for air
pressure is bars. There are 100 kilopas-
cals (kPa) to 1 bar.
Maximum load rating
The maximum load in kilograms and pounds
that can be carried by the tire.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The sum of curb weight, accessory weight,
total load limit and production options
weight.
Maximum permissible tire inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should ever be put in the tire.
Tires and wheels
141
>> Operation.
Z
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants the vehicle is
designed to seat, multiplied by 68 kilo-
grams (150 lbs).
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle
at their designated seating positions.
Production options weight
The combined weight of those installed
regular production options weighing over
5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those
standard items which they replace, not
previously considered in curb weight or
accessory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery, and special trim.
PSI (Pounds per square inch)
A standard unit of measure for air pres-
sure.
Recommended tire inflation pressure
The recommended tire inflation pressure
for normal driving conditions is listed on
the Tire and Loading Information placard
located on driver’s door B‑pillar and pro-
vides best handling, tread life and riding
comfort.
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are
seated.
Sidewall
The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Unique identifier which facilitates
efforts by tire manufacturers to notify
purchasers in recall situations or other
safety matters concerning tires and gives
purchasers the means to easily identify
such tires. The TIN is comprised of “Man-
ufacturer’s identification mark”, “Tire
size”, “Tire type code” and “Date of manu-
facture”.
Tire load rating
Numerical code associated with the maxi-
mum load a tire can support.
Tire ply composition and material used
This indicates the number of plies or the
number of layers of rubber-coated fabric
in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manu-
facturers also must indicate the ply mate-
rials in the tire and sidewall, which
include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
Tire speed rating
Part of tire designation; indicates the
speed range for which a tire is approved.
Total load limit
Rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kilo-
grams (150 lbs) times the vehicle’s desig-
nated seating capacity.
Traction
Force exerted by the vehicle on the road via
the tires. The amount of grip provided.
Tread
The portion of a tire that comes into con-
tact with the road.
142
Tires and wheels
>> Operation.
Treadwear indicators
Narrow bands, sometimes called “wear
bars” that show across the tread of a tire
when only
1
/
16
in (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
A tire information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a tire’s trac-
tion, temperature and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers
using U.S. government testing procedures.
The ratings are molded into the sidewall of
the tire.
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is deter-
mined by distributing to each axle its
share of the maximum loaded vehicle
weight and dividing it by two.
Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your vehi-
cle winterized at an authorized smart
center.
This service includes:
R
Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
concentration.
R
Addition of washer concentrate to the
water of the windshield/rear window.
Use a windshield washer concentrate
labeled for winter which is formulated
for temperatures below freezing point
(Y page 222).
R
Battery test. Battery capacity drops with
decreasing ambient temperature. A well
charged battery helps to make sure the
engine can be started, even at low ambi-
ent temperatures.
R
Tire change.
Winter tires
G
WARNING
Winter tires with a tread depth of less
than
1
/
6
in (4 mm) must be replaced. They
are no longer suitable for winter opera-
tion.
Always use winter tires at temperatures
below 45¦ (7¥) and whenever wintry road
conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated tires
provide special winter performance. Make
sure the tires you use show the mountain/
snowflake marking i on the tire side-
wall. These tires meet specific snow trac-
tion performance requirements of the Rub-
ber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and
the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) and
have been designed specifically for use in
snow conditions. Use of winter tires is the
only way to achieve the maximum effective-
ness of the ABS and ESP
®
in winter opera-
tion.
For safe handling, make sure all mounted
winter tires are of the same make and have
the same tread design.
For information on winter tires for your
vehicle model, see the "Technical data"
section (Y page 216).
Always observe the speed rating of the win-
ter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
maximum speed for which your tires are
rated is below the speed rating of your
vehicle, you must place a notice to this
effect where it will be seen by the driver.
Such notices are available at your tire
dealer or any authorized smart center.
Snow chains*
!
Remember that snow chains must always
be compatible with the tire sizes of a
vehicle. Snow chains that are approved
by smart are only permitted for the fol-
lowing tire size:
175/55 R15 on the rear axle.
Winter driving
143
>> Operation.
* optional
Z
For safety reasons, smart recommends
that you only use snow chains that have
been approved by smart.
Information on this is available from any
smart center.
Please refer to the separate operating
instructions for detailed information on
mounting the snow chains.
Snow chains should only be driven on
snow-covered roads at speeds not to
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains
as soon as possible when driving on roads
without snow.
Please observe the following guidelines
when using snow chains:
R
Using snow chains is not permissible
with all wheel/tire combinations
(Y page 216).
R
Use snow chains in pairs and on rear
wheels only. Follow the manufacturer’s
mounting instructions.
R
Use of snow chains may be prohibited
depending on location. Always check
local and state laws before mounting
snow chains.
G
WARNING
When mounting or removing snow chains,
always park your vehicle on level ground,
engage the parking brake, and turn off the
engine. The vehicle could otherwise move
and injure yourself or other road users.
G
WARNING
When mounting and removing snow chains,
ensure that you and your vehicle are at a
safe distance from moving traffic. Not
doing so could endanger other road users or
even lead to you being injured by the vehi-
cles behind you.
G
WARNING
The vehicle’s handling changes when driv-
ing with snow chains on any kind of road
surface. This means that you should always
adapt your driving style to suit the current
road and weather conditions.
!
If snow chains that do not meet require-
ments are mounted, they may scrape
against the body or axle components when
the vehicle is in motion. This could
result in damage to the rim/tire or vehi-
cle.
Driving instructions
Drinking and driving
G
WARNING
Do not drink alcohol or take drugs and drive
or allow anyone to drive who has been
drinking alcohol or taking drugs. Even a
small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect
your reflexes, perceptions and judgment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal
accident are greatly increased when you
drink or take drugs and drive.
Pedals
G
WARNING
Make sure absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of motion.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
obstacles. If there are any floormats* or
carpets in the footwell, make sure the ped-
als still have sufficient clearance.
During sudden acceleration or braking
maneuvers, the objects could get caught
between or beneath the pedals and restrict
your ability to brake or accelerate. This
could lead to accidents and/or injury.
Power assistance
G
WARNING
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steer-
ing* systems. In this case, it is important
144
Driving instructions
>> Operation.
* optional
to keep in mind that a considerably higher
degree of effort is necessary to brake and
steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving
accordingly.
Brakes
G
WARNING
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out braking maneu-
vers.
Refer to the description of the hydraulic
brake assistant (Y page 47).
!
Because the ESP
®
operates automati-
cally, the engine must be turned off
(ignition switched off) when the parking
brake is being tested on a brake test
dynamometer. Active braking action
through the ESP
®
may otherwise seriously
damage the brake system which is not
covered by the smart Limited Warranty.
Brake pad wear or a leak in the brake system
may be the reason for low brake fluid level
in the brake fluid reservoir.
The brake fluid level in the brake fluid
reservoir may be too low if the brake warn-
ing lamp in the instrument cluster comes
on (Y page 21) although the parking brake
is released.
Have the brake system inspected immedi-
ately. Contact an authorized smart center.
All checks and service work on the brake
system should be carried out by qualified
technicians only. Contact an authorized
smart center.
Only install brake pads and use brake fluid
recommended by smart.
Inclines
!
When driving down long and steep
grades, relieve the load on the brakes by
shifting into a lower gear to use the
engine’s braking power. This helps pre-
vent overheating of the brakes and
reduces brake pad wear.
When using the engine’s braking power, a
drive wheel may not spin for an extended
period of time, e.g. on slippery road
surfaces. This may cause serious damage
to the drive- train which is not covered
by the smart Limited Warranty.
High and low stresses
G
WARNING
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads.
It can also result in the brakes overheat-
ing, thereby significantly reducing their
effectiveness and your ability to stop the
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci-
dent.
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
on for some time, rather than immediately
park, so that the air stream will cool down
the brakes faster.
If your brake system is normally only sub-
jected to moderate loads, you should occa-
sionally test the effectiveness of the
brakes by applying above-normal braking
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
enhance the grip of the brake pads.
G
WARNING
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking
maneuvers.
Wet road surface
G
WARNING
After driving in heavy rain for some time
without applying the brakes or through
water deep enough to wet brake components,
the first braking action may be somewhat
reduced and increased pedal pressure may
be necessary to obtain expected braking
Driving instructions
145
>> Operation.
Z
effect. Maintain a safe distance from vehi-
cles in front.
To help prevent brake disc corrosion after
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the
vehicle with considerable force prior to
parking. The heat generated serves to dry
the brakes.
G
WARNING
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking
maneuvers.
Limited braking effect on salted roads
Remember that the effect of the brakes can
be limited on salted road surfaces. A layer
of salt can form on brake discs and brake
pads, considerably reducing the friction
between the brake disc and the brake pad.
The effect is most noticeable after long
trips without braking, e.g. on the highway,
and after the vehicle has been parked for
several hours.
G
WARNING
The accumulation of salt on brake discs and
brake pads reduces braking effectiveness
and increases the distance necessary to
come to a complete standstill. This could
potentially cause an accident and/or per-
sonal injury.
To avoid this risk, you should
R
brake carefully every now and then on
salted roads in order to remove any layer
of salt on the brake disc and brake pad,
but do so without endangering any other
road users
R
keep a good safe distance from the vehi-
cle in front and drive carefully
R
press the brake carefully at the end of the
trip and again when beginning the next
trip in order to remove any salt residues
from the brake disc
New brake pads
Only install brake pads recommended by
smart.
G
WARNING
If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended brake
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
safe braking is substantially impaired.
This could result in an accident.
G
WARNING
New brake pads will not achieve their opti-
mal braking effect until after several hun-
dred miles (kilometers). This means that
you must compensate for the reduced brak-
ing effect by pressing harder on the brake
pedal and adapt your driving style accord-
ingly. The same applies after brake pads or
brake discs have been changed.
Drive sensibly - save fuel
Fuel consumption, to a great extent,
depends on driving habits and operating
conditions.
To save fuel you should:
R
Shift gears in a timely manner.
R
Avoid frequent acceleration and decel-
eration.
R
Keep tires at the recommended inflation
pressures.
R
Remove carriers* when not in use.
R
Remove unnecessary loads.
R
Allow engine to warm up under low load
use.
R
Have all maintenance work performed at
the intervals specified in the Mainte-
nance Booklet and as required by the
Maintenance System. Contact an author-
ized smart center.
Fuel consumption is also increased by
driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go
traffic, on short trips, and in hilly areas.
146
Driving instructions
>> Operation.
* optional
Catalytic converter
Your smart is equipped with monolithic-
type catalytic converter, an important ele-
ment in conjunction with the oxygen sen-
sors to achieve substantial control of the
pollutants in the exhaust emissions. Keep
your vehicle in proper operating condi-
tion by following our recommended main-
tenance instructions as outlined in your
Maintenance Booklet.
G
WARNING
The catalytic converter can become very
hot. Coming into contact with the catalytic
converter could result in burns.
Note the following:
R
Do not remove the protective heat guards.
R
Do not apply any underseal.
R
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park, or
operate this vehicle in areas where com-
bustible materials such as grass, hay, or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could
be ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
!
To prevent damage to the catalytic con-
verter, only use premium unleaded gas-
oline in this vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine
operation should be repaired promptly.
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may
reach the catalytic converter, causing it
to overheat and potentially start a fire.
It is essential to observe the following
points, as there is otherwise a danger of
overheating and the catalytic converter
may be damaged.
R
Fill up only with premium unleaded gas-
oline. Even small quantities of leaded
gasoline can damage the catalytic con-
verter.
R
Make sure you adhere to the prescribed
service intervals.
R
Never run the fuel tank empty.
R
If the engine starts to misfire, bring the
vehicle to an immediate standstill with-
out endangering traffic.
R
If the engine fails to start the first time,
you should not try to start it any more
than three times in succession.
R
Do not try to start for more than four sec-
onds at a time.
Tires
G
WARNING
If you feel a sudden significant vibration
or ride disturbance, or you suspect that
possible damage to your vehicle has occur-
red, you should turn on the hazard warning
flashers, carefully slow down, and drive
with caution to an area which is a safe dis-
tance from the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest smart center or tire dealer for
repairs.
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and
become visible at a tread depth of approx-
imately
1
/
16
in (1.6 mm), at which point the
tire is considered worn and should be
replaced.
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
G
WARNING
Although the applicable federal motor
vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be
worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI)
become visible at approximately
1
/
16
in
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow
your tires to wear down to that level. As
tread depth approaches
1
/
8
in (3 mm), the
adhesion properties on a wet road are
sharply reduced.
Driving instructions
147
>> Operation.
Z
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction var-
ies widely.
Specified tire inflation pressures must be
maintained. This applies particularly if
the tires are subject to high loads (e.g.
high speeds, heavy loads, high ambient
temperatures).
G
WARNING
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire will
affect your ability to steer or brake and may
cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
Continued driving with a flat tire or driv-
ing at high speed with a flat tire will cause
excessive heat build-up and possibly a
fire.
For more information, see “Tires and
wheels” (Y page 124).
Hydroplaning
Depending on the depth of the water layer
on the road, hydroplaning may occur
resulting in a loss of control, even at low
speeds and with new tires. Reduce vehicle
speed, avoid track grooves in the road and
apply brakes cautiously when it is raining.
Tire traction
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
road is always lower than on a dry road.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
temperatures are close to the freezing
point.
G
WARNING
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
will be substantially reduced. Under such
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
with extreme caution.
smart recommends winter tires
(Y page 143) with a minimum tread depth of
approximately
1
/
6
in (4 mm) on all four
wheels for the winter season to ensure nor-
mal balanced handling characteristics. On
packed snow, they can reduce your stopping
distance compared to summer tires.
Stopping distance, however, is still con-
siderably greater than when the road is not
covered with snow or ice. Exercise appro-
priate caution.
!
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period when driving off on
slippery road surfaces. Otherwise, the
drivetrain could be damaged, which is
not covered by the smart Limited War-
ranty.
Tire speed rating
Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent
driving speeds appropriate to prevailing
conditions.
G
WARNING
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi-
mum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire fail-
ure, causing loss of vehicle control and
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of 90 mph
(145 km/h).
The factory equipped tires on your vehicle
may have a tire speed rating above the max-
imum speed permitted by the electronic
speed limiter.
Make sure your tires have the required tire
speed rating as specified for your vehicle
in the “Technical data section”
(Y page 216), for example when purchasing
new tires.
148
Driving instructions
>> Operation.
For information on how to identify the tire
speed rating on a tire’s sidewall, see “Tire
size designation, load and speed rating”
(Y page 137).
If you are uncertain about the correct read-
ing of the information given on a tire’s
sidewall, any authorized smart center will
be glad to assist you.
i
For information on speed ratings for
winter tires, see “All-season and winter
tires” (Y page 138).
Winter driving instructions
The most important rule for slippery or icy
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
maneuvers.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
move gear selector lever to neutral posi-
tion N. Try to keep the vehicle under
control by corrective steering action.
For information on driving with snow
chains*, see “Snow chains*” (Y page 143).
G
WARNING
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This
could result in drive wheel slip and
reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS
will not prevent this type of loss of control.
Road salts and chemicals can adversely
affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
force may become necessary to produce the
normal braking effect.
Depressing the brake pedal periodically
when traveling at length on salt-strewn
roads can bring road-salt-impaired brak-
ing efficiency back to normal.
If the vehicle is parked after being driven
on salt-treated roads, the braking effi-
ciency should be tested as soon as possible
after driving is resumed.
G
WARNING
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking
maneuvers.
G
WARNING
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe
and from around the vehicle with the engine
running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monox-
ide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior
resulting in unconsciousness and death.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
open a window slightly on the side of the
vehicle not facing the wind.
G
WARNING
The outside temperature display is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that pur-
pose. Indicated temperatures just above
the freezing point do not guarantee that the
road surface is free of ice.
For more information, see “Winter driving”
(Y page 143).
Standing water
!
Do not drive through flooded areas or
water of unknown depth. Before driving
through water, determine its depth.
Never accelerate before driving into
water. The bow wave could force water
into the engine and auxiliary equip-
ment, thus damaging them.
If you must drive through standing water,
drive slowly to prevent water from entering
R
the front compartment
R
the engine compartment
R
the passenger compartment
Water in these areas could cause damage to
electrical components or wiring of the
engine or transmission, or could result in
water being ingested by the engine through
Driving instructions
149
>> Operation.
* optional
Z
the air intake, causing severe internal
engine damage.
Any such damage is not covered by the smart
Limited Warranty.
Passenger compartment
G
WARNING
Always fasten items being carried as
securely as possible.
In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
den maneuvers, loose items thrown around
inside the vehicle may injure vehicle
occupants.
The cargo compartment is the preferred
place to carry objects.
Control and operation of radio trans-
mitters
Radio and telephone
G
WARNING
Please do not forget that your primary
responsibility is to drive the vehicle
safely. Only operate the radio or tele-
phone
16
if road, weather and traffic con-
ditions permit.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approx-
imately 14 m) every second.
Telephones and two-way radios
G
WARNING
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e.
without being connected to an external
antenna) from inside the vehicle while the
engine is running. Doing so could lead to a
malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic
system, possibly resulting in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Radio transmitters, such as a mobile phone
or a citizens band unit should only be used
inside the vehicle if they are connected to
an antenna that is installed on the outside
of the vehicle.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation
instructions regarding use of an external
antenna.
Emission control
Certain engine systems serve to keep the
toxic components of the exhaust gases
within permissible legal limits.
These systems, of course, will function
properly only when maintained strictly
according to factory specifications.
Any adjustments to the engine should
therefore be carried out only by qualified
smart center authorized technicians.
Engine adjustments should not be altered
in any way. Moreover, the specified service
jobs must be carried out regularly accord-
ing to smart servicing requirements. For
details refer to the Maintenance Booklet.
G
WARNING
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains car-
bon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can
cause unconsciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driv-
ing, have the cause determined and cor-
rected immediately. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive only with at
least one window fully open at all times.
Coolant temperature
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant tem-
perature may rise.
16
Observe all legal requirements.
150
Driving instructions
>> Operation.
!
Excessive coolant temperature causes
the red coolant temperature warning
lamp ? in the instrument cluster to
come on.
The engine should not be operated with
the red coolant temperature warning
lamp ? illuminated. Doing so may
cause serious engine damage which is
not covered by the smart Limited War-
ranty.
For more information on coolant tempera-
ture warning lamp (Y page 170).
G
WARNING
Driving when your engine is overheated can
cause some fluids which may have leaked
into the engine compartment to catch fire.
You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns which can occur just by open-
ing the engine hood. Stay away from the
engine if you see or hear steam coming from
it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away
from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get
out of the vehicle and do not stand near the
vehicle until the engine has cooled down.
Driving abroad
Abroad, there is an extensive smart service
network at your disposal. If you plan to
drive into areas which are not listed in the
index of your smart center directory, you
should request pertinent information from
an authorized smart center.
Symmetrical low beams
i
If you drive in countries where vehi-
cles drive on the other side of the road
than the country in which the vehicle is
registered, you must have the headlamps
modified for symmetrical low beams.
Relevant information can be obtained at
any authorized smart center.
Vehicle care
Care tips
Regular and proper care will help to main-
tain the value of your vehicle. The best way
to protect your vehicle from harmful envi-
ronmental influences is to wash it and use
protective treatments regularly.
smart recommends that you care for the
paintwork at least twice a year (e.g. in the
spring and autumn).
G
WARNING
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Always follow the instructions on the par-
ticular container. Always open your vehi-
cle’s doors or windows when cleaning the
inside.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not
designed for cleaning your vehicle.
Always lock away cleaning products and
keep them out of reach of children.
!
Follow the care tips. Wash your vehicle
preferably by hand.
While in operation or even while parked,
your vehicle is subjected to varying exter-
nal influences, which left unchecked can
attack the paint as well as the vehicle
underbody and lead to permanent damage.
Such damage is caused not only by extreme
and varying climatic conditions, but also
by:
R
Air pollution
R
Road salt
R
Tar
R
Gravel and stone chipping
Vehicle care
151
>> Operation.
Z
To avoid paint damage, you should imme-
diately remove:
R
Insects
R
Bird droppings
R
Tree sap, etc.
R
Grease and oil
R
Brake fluid
R
Coolant
R
Fuel
R
Tar spots
!
Failure to remove such dirt immedi-
ately can cause damage to the paint or the
soft top fabric*. Environmental influen-
ces are not covered by the smart Limited
Warranty.
Frequent washing reduces and/or elimi-
nates the aggressiveness and potency of the
above adverse influences.
More frequent washings are necessary to
deal with unfavorable conditions:
R
near the ocean
R
in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
emissions)
R
during winter operation
You should check your vehicle from time to
time for stone chipping or other damage.
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
possible to prevent corrosion.
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thor-
ough check is a washing of the underbody
followed by a thorough inspection. Dam-
aged areas need to be re-undercoated.
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory
with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
cavities which will last for the lifetime of
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
neither necessary nor recommended by
smart because of the possibility of incom-
patibility between materials used in the
production process and others applied
later.
We have selected vehicle-care products
and compiled recommendations which are
specially matched to our vehicles and
which always reflect the latest technology.
You can obtain smart approved vehicle-
care products at an authorized smart
center.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion
or damage due to negligent or incorrect
care cannot always be removed or repaired
with the vehicle-care products recom-
mended here. In such cases it is best to seek
aid at an authorized smart center.
The following topics deal with the cleaning
and care of your vehicle and give important
“how-to” information as well as references
to smart approved vehicle-care products.
Vehicle care
Contact an authorized smart center for rec-
ommended and approved care products.
i
Advice on caring for the soft top sys-
tem, see (Y page 155).
G
WARNING
After washing the vehicle, the brakes may
still be wet and thus their functionality
impaired. Therefore, when you start off,
brake lightly several times without endan-
gering traffic.
152
Vehicle care
>> Operation.
* optional
Selecting the right cleaning agent
!
To avoid damage to interior equipment and materials: Never rub roughly or use
cleaning spirits on the cloth upholstery, never use strong agents, stain remover etc.
on the leather upholstery. Never scour or use solvent on plastic parts. Never use strong
and aggressive agents on windows, do not touch the inside of the windows with hard
objects such as an ice scraper or ring, doing so may damage the windows.
Interior Special considera-
tions
Light soiling Heavy soiling
Cloth upholstery Use a clean, lint-
free cloth
Light soap suds Stain remover (test
on an inconspicuous
place first)
Plastic parts Use a color-fast
cloth
Damp, clean cloth,
cockpit spray
Damp, clean cloth,
cockpit spray
Leather upholstery Use a clean, color-
fast cloth
Clean cloth with
lukewarm water,
leather care prod-
uct
Leather care prod-
uct
Windows Damp, clean cloth,
microfiber cloth,
glass cleaner
Microfiber cloth,
glass cleaner
!
To avoid damage to exterior surfaces never do the following: Use aggressive paint
cleaner, machine polish, abrasive cleanser, acidic, highly alkaline agents, abrasive
sponges, high-pressure or hot water cleaning equipment.
Exterior Special considera-
tions
Lightly soiled
Hand-/Automatic
car washes
Heavily soiled
Hand-/Automatic
car washes
tridion safety cell,
black
Powder coated sin-
gle-coat paint fin-
ish
Car shampoo con-
centrate, insect
remover for insect
remains, polish
Car shampoo con-
centrate, hard wax,
insect remover for
insect remains,
polish
tridion safety cell,
silver
Powder coated sin-
gle-coat paint fin-
ish and clearcoat
Highly polished
plastic parts (body
panels)
Body panels with
base coat and clear-
coat or clearcoat
only
Vehicle care
153
>> Operation.
Z
Exterior Special considera-
tions
Lightly soiled
Hand-/Automatic
car washes
Heavily soiled
Hand-/Automatic
car washes
Wheels and wheel
covers
Two-layer metallic
paint (high-gloss)
Car shampoo con-
centrate, rim care
Car shampoo con-
centrate, rim care
Retractable soft top PAC fabric Car shampoo con-
centrate, soft top
cleaner, impregna-
tion spray
Car shampoo con-
centrate, soft top
cleaner, impregna-
tion spray
Removing insects
Remove insect remains before you start to
wash the vehicle.
X
Spray insect remover on.
X
Allow insect remover to work in briefly.
X
Rub in gently with a soft cloth or sponge.
X
Rinse with plenty of water.
X
Treat the cleaned surface with hard wax.
Removing tar
Remove any tar marks before washing the
vehicle.
X
Apply tar remover with a soft cloth.
X
Allow tar remover to work in briefly.
X
Rub in gently.
X
Rinse with plenty of water.
X
Treat the cleaned surface with hard wax.
Vehicle washing
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces
of road salt as soon as possible.
When washing the vehicle underbody, do not
forget to clean the inner sides of the
wheels.
Washing your vehicle by hand
X
Wash the vehicle using car shampoo con-
centrate and a sponge.
X
Rinse with clean water.
X
Towel dry the vehicle.
!
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-
light. The body panel surfaces and paint
finish may be damaged.
Washing your vehicle in an automatic car
wash
i
When running your vehicle through an
automatic car wash, water droplets can
run down the inside of the side windows.
Unscrew your vehicle’s antenna before
driving into an automatic car wash.
X
Removing: Unscrew antenna : counter-
clockwise.
X
Fitting: Screw antenna : in clockwise.
Power washer
G
WARNING
Do not use a round nozzle (dirt grinders) to
powerwash your vehicle, in particular the
tires. You could otherwise damage the tires
and cause an accident.
154
Vehicle care
>> Operation.
!
Do not aim directly at
R
electrical parts
R
electrical connectors
R
seals
R
other rubber parts
The distance should be at least 3.9 in
(10 cm) and the water temperature must
not exceed 140¦ (60¥). Follow the
instructions provided by the power
washer manufacturer on maintaining a
distance between the vehicle and the
nozzle of the power washer.
Always keep the jet of water moving
across the surface.
Wheel cover*
X
Wash the wheel cover with shampoo and a
soft brush or in the car wash.
Decorative foils
!
Decorative foils are permanently
adhered to the painted parts of the vehi-
cle and cannot be removed.
!
Do not expose the foils to solvents, gas-
oline or diesel.
i When cleaning with a power washer, note
the following guideline values:
R
Water temperature max. 176¦ (80¥)
R
Minimum distance 11.8 in (30 cm)
R
Jet of water strike at a right angle
Paintwork care
The frequency with which you care for your
paintwork is dependent on
R
how much the vehicle is used
R
where you normally park the vehicle (e.g.
in a garage or under a tree)
R
the season
R
weather and environmental influences
Rectifying paintwork damage
You can use a touch-up paint pen to repair
minimal stone chip damage and scratches.
Recommended touch-up paint pens can be
obtained in a smart center.
i
For any major paintwork damage, please
contact a smart center.
Exterior Repair options
Plastic parts (body
panels) with clear-
coat
Clearcoat touch-up
paint pen
Body panels with
base coat and
clearcoat
recommended
touch-up paint pen
set in the relevant
color
tridion safety cell recommended
touch-up paint pen
set in the relevant
color
Soft top system (cabriolet only)
Regular care will protect the retractable
soft top and the rear soft top against exter-
nal influences, helping to preserve its
value. Use only an approved soft top
cleaner when removing dirt from the soft
top.
!
Never clean the soft top using a power
washer, as water could get into the inside
of the vehicle.
Cleaning the soft top fabric
!
Only clean the retractable soft top and
the rear soft top when they are closed.
Dry cleaning
X
Brush the soft top fabric with a soft
brush, always working in the same direc-
tion, i.e. from front to back.
Vehicle care
155
>> Operation.
* optional
Z
Wet cleaning
smart recommends that you use an approved
car shampoo concentrate and soft top
cleaner.
X
“Dry clean” the vehicle first.
X
Wash the soft top off using a soft brush or
sponge and plenty of lukewarm water.
X
Then rinse thoroughly with clear water.
i
If you have the vehicle cleaned in a car
wash, you may find that some water gets
into the interior.
156
Vehicle care
>> Operation.
>> Practical hints.
Where will I find ... .......................... 158
Display messages ............................. 158
What to do if ... ............................... 162
Unlocking/locking manually ............... 176
Replacing transmitter battery ............ 177
Replacing bulbs ...............................178
Replacing wiper blades ..................... 184
Flat tire ........................................ 186
Wheel change .................................. 194
Battery .......................................... 196
Jump starting .................................. 199
Towing .......................................... 202
Fuses ............................................ 205
Where will I find ...
Tire repair kit
The tire repair kit is located in the
passenger footwell under the carpet.
X
Insert a suitable object such as a coin
into the slot of carpet holder :.
X
Turn carpet holder : counterclockwise.
X
Lift the carpet.
;
Tire repair kit
The following is included:
R
Tire sealant container
R
Electric air pump with filler hose
R
Sticker
R
Operating instructions label (on the
inside of the tire repair kit lid)
i
The tire sealant container is located
below the tire repair kit.
G
WARNING
The tire repair kit is a limited repair
device. In case of a breakdown caused by a
flat tire, read through the section flat tire
carefully. When using the tire repair kit
follow the instructions in this section.
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in severe injury or death.
Display messages
The following display messages appear in
the multifunction display (Y page 86).
You can confirm certain display messages
on vehicles with control system*.
X
Confirming messages: Press the OK but-
ton on the control lever briefly
(Y page 93).
158
Display messages
>> Practical hints.
* optional
Vehicles without control system
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The electronic immobilizer is not working.
X
Have the system checked at an authorized smart center.
There is a malfunction in the shifting system.
X
Have the system checked at an authorized smart center.
The transmission is taught-in (Y page 85).
X
Have the system checked at an authorized smart center.
Vehicles with control system*
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
?
Switch Engine OffSwitch Engine Off
The coolant is too hot.
X
Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is safe to do so.
X
Turn off the engine immediately.
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Make sure the air supply for the radiator is uninterrupted.
X
Only start the engine again after the display message dis-
appears. You could otherwise damage the engine.
G
WARNING
Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into
the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of
the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.
!
Among other possible causes, the poly-V-belt could be broken. Do not continue to
drive. Otherwise, the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may
result in damage to the engine.
Display messages
159
>> Practical hints.
* optional
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
4
Switch Engine OffSwitch Engine Off
The engine oil level is too low. The engine could be damaged.
X
Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
X
Turn off the engine.
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Check the engine oil level (Y page 118) and add engine oil as
required (Y page 119).
J
Release ParkingRelease Parking
BrakeBrake
You are driving with the parking brake engaged.
X
Release the parking brake.
5
ShiftShift toto NN oror PP toto
StartStart
You have attempted to start the engine while the automatic
transmission was in reverse gear R or drive position D.
Shift the automatic transmission into park position P or neu-
tral position N.
5
Apply Brakes toApply Brakes to
StartStart
You have attempted to start the engine without depressing the
brake pedal.
Depress the brake pedal to start the engine.
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Charge BatteryCharge Battery
The battery is not being charged.
Possible causes:
R
alternator malfunctioning
R
broken poly-V-belt
X
Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is safe to do so.
X
Turn off the engine immediately.
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Check the poly-V-belt.
X
If poly-V-belt is broken: Do not continue to drive. Contact
an authorized smart center.
X
If poly-V-belt is intact: Have the vehicle checked at an
authorized smart center immediately.
!
Among other possible causes, the poly-V-belt could be broken. Do not continue to
drive. Otherwise, the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may
result in damage to the engine.
160
Display messages
>> Practical hints.
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
6
Reserve FuelReserve Fuel
The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark.
X
Refuel at the next gas station.
Ö
Driver´s Door AjarDriver´s Door Ajar
The driver’s door is open.
X
Close the driver’s door.
Ø
Door AjarDoor Ajar
The passenger door is open.
X
Close the passenger door.
Õ
Tailgate OpenTailgate Open
A tailgate or the rear soft top
17
is open.
X
Close the tailgates or the rear soft.
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
h
CheckCheck TireTire PressurePressure
The tire inflation pressure in at least one tire is signifi-
cantly below the reference value.
X
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steer-
ing and braking maneuvers.
X
Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required
(Y page 127).
X
If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 194).
G
WARNING
Each tire should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure rec-
ommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires
is significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even
if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the
17
cabriolet only.
Display messages
161
>> Practical hints.
Z
low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of incom-
patible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Ò
Danger: IceDanger: Ice
(Canada only)
The outside temperature is below 3¥. The road may be icy.
X
Adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather
conditions.
X
Confirming message: Press the OK button on the control lever
briefly (Y page 93).
G
WARNING
The display message Danger:Danger: IceIce is not designed as an ice-warning device and is therefore
unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface
is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. Your
vehicle could start to skid if you do not adjust your driving style accordingly.
Therefore, always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
What to do if ...
Warning and indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster
General information
If any of the following lamps in the instru-
ment cluster fails to come on during the
bulb self-check when switching on igni-
tion (Y page 57), have the respective bulb
checked and replaced if necessary.
162
What to do if ...
>> Practical hints.
Brake
Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
ò (USA only)
! (Canada only)
The ABS indicator
lamp illuminates
while the engine is
running.
There is a malfunction in the ABS system.
X
Have the ABS system checked at an authorized smart center
immediately.
ò (USA only)
! (Canada only)
The ABS indicator
lamp illuminates
together with the
brake warning lamp
while the engine is
running.
The ABS system fails.
X
Stop the vehicle immediately in a safe location.
X
Do not continue to drive.
X
Turn off the engine.
X
Engage the parking brake when leaving the vehicle.
X
Contact Roadside Assistance or an authorized smart center.
G
WARNING
When the ABS system is malfunctioning, the wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing
steering capability and extending the braking distance.
When the ABS is switched off due to a malfunction, the ESP
®
is also switched off. The basic
driving and braking functions are still available.
The risk of your vehicle skidding is then increased in certain situations. You should
therefore always adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road and weather
conditions.
What to do if ...
163
>> Practical hints.
Z
Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
$ (USA only)
J (Canada only)
The brake warning
lamp illuminates
while the engine is
running.
You are driving with the parking brake engaged.
X
Release the parking brake.
The brake circuit fails or the brake fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir is too low.
X
Stop the vehicle immediately in a safe location.
X
Do not continue to drive.
X
Turn off the engine.
X
Do not add brake fluid as this will not solve the problem.
X
Engage the parking brake when leaving the vehicle.
X
Contact Roadside Assistance or an authorized smart center.
$ (USA only)
J (Canada only)
The brake warning
lamp illuminates
together with the ABS
indicator lamp while
the engine is running.
The ABS system has failed.
X
Stop the vehicle immediately in a safe location.
X
Do not continue to drive.
X
Turn off the engine.
X
Engage the parking brake when leaving the vehicle.
X
Contact Roadside Assistance or an authorized smart center.
G
WARNING
Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your brake
system checked immediately if the brake warning lamp stays on.
Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system.
!
If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum
mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks imme-
diately. Contact an authorized smart center immediately. Do not add brake fluid as this
will not solve the problem.
164
What to do if ...
>> Practical hints.
Safety systems
Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
7
The seat belt
telltale illu-
minates con-
stantly for a
maximum of
6 seconds after
starting the
engine.
Regardless of whether the seat belt is fastened or not, the seat
belt telltale always comes on and remains lit for 6 seconds
after starting the engine.
X
Fasten your seat belts.
7
The seat belt
telltale illu-
minates con-
stantly. An
additional
warning chime
sounds for a
maximum of
6 seconds after
starting the
engine.
The driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
X
Fasten your seat belts.
7
The seat belt
telltale flashes
with increas-
ing frequency
of a warning
chime for a
maximum of
60 seconds.
The vehicle speed once exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h), and both the
driver’s and passenger seat belt are unfastened.
X
Fasten your seat belts.
If the driver’s or the passenger seat belt remains unfastened
after 60 seconds, the warning chime stops sounding. The seat
belt telltale stops flashing but continues to be illuminated.
The seat belt telltale will only go out if both the driver’s and
the passenger seat belt (with the passenger seat occupied) are
fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a door is opened.
What to do if ...
165
>> Practical hints.
Z
Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
6
Scenario 1:
The SRS indica-
tor lamp illu-
minates when
the ignition is
switched on and
goes out after a
maximum of
4 seconds.
The subsequent self check of the safety systems detected no
malfunction. The supplemental restraint system is opera-
tional.
6
Scenario 2:
The SRS indica-
tor lamp illu-
minates when
the ignition is
switched on and
goes out after a
maximum of
4 seconds for
approximately
1 second, then it
comes on again
and stays on.
There is a malfunction in the supplemental restraint systems.
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices could deploy
unexpectedly or fail to deploy in an accident.
X
Do not sit on the passenger seat; this applies particularly
to children.
X
Have the system checked at an authorized smart center.
G
WARNING
If the SRS indicator lamp does not come on when you switch on the ignition or does not go
out again after a few seconds once the engine is running or comes on again, the supplemental
restraint systems are malfunctioning.
In the event that a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as described in scenario 2, the SRS
may not be operational. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you contact an author-
ized smart center immediately to have the system checked; A malfunctioning SRS system may
not deploy when needed in an accident resulting in serious or fatal injury, or it might
deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could result in an accident and/or injury to
you or to others.
!
If the SRS indicator lamp comes on while driving, have the system checked at an
authorized smart center immediately.
It is possible that the air bag and the emergency tensioning device could be activated
unintentionally or will not function in the event of an accident.
i
Information on the operating principle of the air bags can be found in the “Safety”
section (Y page 33).
166
What to do if ...
>> Practical hints.
Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
÷
The ESP
®
warn-
ing lamp
flashes while
driving.
The ESP
®
has engaged because of detected traction loss in at
least one tire.
X
When driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.
X
While driving, ease up on the accelerator pedal.
X
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and
weather conditions.
÷
The ESP
®
warn-
ing lamp illu-
minates con-
tinuously while
the engine is
running.
The ESP
®
is not operational due to a system failure.
X
Have the system checked at an authorized smart center.
The ESP
®
is not available.
X
Have the system checked at an authorized smart center.
G
WARNING
When the ESP
®
warning lamp is illuminated continuously, the ESP
®
is not available or not
operational due to a system failure.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and the non-operating status
of the ESP
®
.
i
It may be possible to clear a system failure by restarting the engine.
X
Restart the engine.
If the warning lamp still does not go out, have the system checked at an authorized smart
center immediately.
i
More information on the ESP
®
can be found in the “Safety” section (Y page 47).
Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
D
The yellow EPS*
warning lamp
illuminates
while the
engine is run-
ning.
The Electronic Power Steering (EPS)* is not available.
X
Have the EPS* checked at an authorized smart center imme-
diately.
G
WARNING
When the EPS* is not available a higher degree of effort is necessary to steer the vehicle.
Have the system checked at an authorized smart center.
What to do if ...
167
>> Practical hints.
* optional
Z
Vehicle
Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
The battery
indicator lamp
illuminates
while driving
or does not go
out after the
engine is
started.
The alternator is malfunctioning. The battery is no longer
charged.
X
Stop the vehicle immediately in a safe location.
X
Do not continue to drive.
X
Turn off the engine.
X
Engage the parking brake when leaving the vehicle.
X
Contact Roadside Assistance or an authorized smart center.
The poly-V-belt is broken. The battery is no longer charged.
X
Stop the vehicle immediately in a safe location.
X
Do not continue to drive.
X
Turn off the engine.
X
Engage the parking brake when leaving the vehicle.
X
Contact Roadside Assistance or an authorized smart center.
!
Among other possible causes, the poly-V-belt could be broken. Do not continue to
drive. Otherwise, the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may
result in damage to the engine.
Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
°
¯
The main
service symbol
illuminates
together with
the flashing
care service
symbol after
the engine is
started.
In addition, the
transmission
position indi-
cator flashes.
The gearbox is malfunctioning.
X
Contact Roadside Assistance or an authorized smart center.
168
What to do if ...
>> Practical hints.
Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
K
The high‑beam
headlamp indi-
cator lamp does
not illuminate
when the
high‑beam
headlamps are
switched on or
when using the
high‑beam
flasher.
The high‑beam headlamp indicator lamp has failed.
X
Have the high‑beam headlamp indicator lamp checked at an
authorized smart center.
M
The low‑beam
headlamp indi-
cator lamp does
not illuminate
when the
low‑beam head-
lamps are
switched on.
The low‑beam headlamp indicator lamp has failed.
X
Have the low‑beam headlamp indicator lamp checked at an
authorized smart center.
#!
The turn signal indi-
cator lamp(s) do(es)
not illuminate when
the ignition is
switched on and the
corresponding turn
signal is switched on
or the hazard warning
flasher is switched
on.
The turn signal indicator lamp(s) has (have) failed.
X
Have the turn signal indicator lamp(s) checked at an author-
ized smart center.
#!
The turn signal indi-
cator lamp(s) flashes
at double frequency.
One of the turn signals is malfunctioning.
X
Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 179).
or
X
Have the turn signal checked at an authorized smart center
as soon as possible.
®
The fuel cap
indicator lamp
comes on when
the engine is
running.
The fuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may
be leaky.
X
Check the fuel cap (Y page 116).
X
If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.
X
If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system checked at an
authorized smart center.
What to do if ...
169
>> Practical hints.
Z
Engine
Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
?
The red coolant
temperature
warning lamp
illuminates
while the
engine is run-
ning.
The coolant is too hot.
X
Stop the vehicle immediately in a safe location.
X
Do not continue to drive.
X
Turn off the engine.
X
Engage the parking brake when leaving the vehicle.
X
Contact Roadside Assistance or an authorized smart center.
The coolant level has fallen below the marking bar on the cool-
ant reservoir (Y page 122).
X
Add coolant as required.
X
Have the coolant system checked for leaks at an authorized
smart center.
G
WARNING
Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into
the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of
the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.
!
Among other possible causes, the poly-V-belt could be broken. Do not continue to
drive. Otherwise, the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may
result in damage to the engine.
Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
;
The engine
malfunction
indicator lamp
illuminates
while driving.
There is a malfunction in the system.
X
Have the vehicle checked at an authorized smart center
immediately.
i
Some states may by law require you to visit a workshop as soon as the engine mal-
function indicator lamp comes on. Check local requirements.
170
What to do if ...
>> Practical hints.
Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
5
The engine oil
pressure indi-
cator lamp
illuminates
while driving.
The engine oil pressure is low.
X
Stop the vehicle immediately in a safe location.
X
Do not continue to drive.
X
Turn off the engine.
X
Engage the parking brake when leaving the vehicle.
X
Contact Roadside Assistance or an authorized smart center.
5
The engine oil
pressure indi-
cator lamp goes
out before the
engine starts.
The engine oil pressure indicator lamp has failed.
X
Check the engine oil level.
X
Have the system checked at an authorized smart center.
!
The engine oil pressure indicator lamp should not be ignored. Extended driving with
the engine oil pressure indicator lamp illuminated could result in serious engine
damage that is not covered by the smart Limited Warranty.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)*
Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
h
The yellow com-
bination low
tire pressure/
TPMS malfunc-
tion telltale
illuminates
continuously.
The TPMS detects a loss of pressure in at least one tire.
X
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steer-
ing and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation
around you.
X
Check and correct tire inflation pressure as required
(Y page 126).
If the tire inflation pressure in the respective tire(s) has
(have) been corrected, the combination low tire pressure/TPMS
malfunction telltale goes out after a few minutes of driving.
See also “Restarting the TPMS” (Y page 129).
h
The combina-
tion low tire
pressure/TPMS
malfunction
telltale flashes
60 seconds and
then stays illu-
minated.
There is a malfunction in the TPMS.
X
Have the TPMS checked at an authorized smart center.
After the malfunction has been remedied the combination low
tire pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after a few
minutes of driving.
What to do if ...
171
>> Practical hints.
* optional
Z
G
WARNING
Each tire should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure rec-
ommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires
is significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even
if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the
low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of incom-
patible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
172
What to do if ...
>> Practical hints.
Warning and indicator lamps in the overhead control panel
Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
40
The passenger front
air bag off indicator
lamp illuminates and
remains illuminated
with the weight of a
typical adult or some-
one larger than a
small individual on
the passenger seat.
There is a malfunction in the system.
X
Have the system checked at an authorized smart center.
40
The passenger front
air bag off indicator
lamp does not illumi-
nate or remains out
with the weight of a
typical 12‑month‑old
child in a standard
child restraint or less
on the passenger seat
There is a malfunction in the system.
X
Have the system checked at an authorized smart center.
G
WARNING
If the 40indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated with the weight
of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual on the passenger seat, do not
have any passenger use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
G
WARNING
If the 40indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of
a typical 12‑month‑old child in a standard child restraint or less on the passenger seat, do
not transport a child on the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
What to do if ...
173
>> Practical hints.
Z
Engine
Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The engine does not
start.
X
Check if
R
the gear selector lever is in park position P
R
the brake pedal has been depressed
R
the transmission position indicator is on PP or NN
The engine does not
start within 4 sec-
onds.
X
Wait for a few seconds.
X
Repeat the starting procedure.
Remember that extended starting attempts can drain the
vehicle battery.
The engine does not
start after several
starting attempts.
X
Engage the parking brake when leaving the vehicle.
X
Contact Roadside Assistance or an authorized smart center.
Loss of key
Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
You lose a key.
X
Have the key deactivated at an authorized smart center.
X
Report the loss of the key to your car insurance company
immediately.
X
If necessary, have the mechanical lock replaced.
Your authorized smart center will be glad to supply you with a
replacement following an identity check.
174
What to do if ...
>> Practical hints.
Acoustic warning signals
Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Once the anti-theft
warning system* has
been armed, a visual
and audible alarm is
triggered.
The alarm is triggered when
R
someone opens a door or the tailgate
R
the driver’s door is unlocked with the key (Y page 176)
R
the vehicle’s interior is entered
R
there is motion inside the vehicle
R
the vehicle is raised
To cancel the alarm:
X
Insert the key in the starter switch.
X
Turn the key to starter switch position 1.
or
X
Press button # or * on the key.
A warning signal
sounds.
The door is opened while a gear is engaged with the engine
running and neither the brake nor accelerator pedals are
depressed.
X
Close the driver’s and passenger door.
X
Move the gear selector lever to park position P.
or
X
Turn off the engine.
You open the driver’s door with the key in starter switch posi-
tion 0 to remind you not to leave the key in the vehicle.
X
Close the driver’s door.
or
X
Remove the key from the starter switch.
A warning signal
sounds.
The seat belts are not fastened when the engine is started. For
details, see seat belt telltale (Y page 165).
X
Fasten your seat belts.
What to do if ...
175
>> Practical hints.
* optional
Z
Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
A warning signal
sounds when parking.
You have not engaged the parking brake before releasing the
brake pedal, turning off the engine, and switching off the
ignition.
X
Switch on the ignition to deactivate the acoustic warning.
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Make sure the gear selector lever is in park position P.
X
Turn the key to starter switch position 0.
X
Remove the key from the starter switch.
For safety, it is important that you perform the parking pro-
cedure as described (Y page 79).
You can hear a contin-
uous noise from the
front axle when brak-
ing.
The vehicle is equipped with a mechanical/acoustic brake pad
indicator.
X
Have the brake pads checked at an authorized smart center.
Unlocking/locking manually
Unlocking the vehicle
You can unlock the driver’s door and the
fuel filler flap by unlocking the driver’s
door using the key. The lock cylinder is
fitted with a cap.
X
Press button # on the key.
The anti-theft warning system* is dis-
armed.
i
If the transmitter battery in the key is
discharged, the anti-theft warning sys-
tem* can no longer be disarmed with but-
ton # on the key.
For replacing the transmitter battery
(Y page 177).
Unlocking the vehicle with the key and
opening a door or the tailgate will trig-
ger the anti-theft warning system*
(Y page 48).
To cancel the alarm:
X
Insert the key in the starter switch.
X
Turn the key to starter switch position 1.
X
Remove cap : from lock cylinder ;.
X
Unlock the driver’s door.
The driver’s door and the fuel filler flap
are unlocked.
i
To unlock the vehicle centrally press
the central unlocking switch in the upper
center console (Y page 26).
Locking the vehicle
If you can no longer lock the vehicle using
the remote control and you do not have a
spare transmitter battery at hand, please
proceed as follows:
176
Unlocking/locking manually
>> Practical hints.
* optional
X
Open the driver’s door.
X
Press the central locking switch
(Y page 54).
The indicator lamp on the central lock-
ing switch comes on, when the starter
switch is in position 1.
The indicator lamp on the central lock-
ing switch flashes, when the starter
switch is in position 0.
X
Remove the key from the starter switch,
take it with you, and close all doors.
The vehicle is now locked and the anti-
theft warning system* is armed.
Closing the rear soft top
If the rear soft top does not lock properly
after being closed, proceed as follows:
X
Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Make sure the key is in starter switch
position 1.
X
Fold up the rear soft top completely.
The rear soft top stops in the unlocked
position.
X
Within one minute, press and hold symbol
G on the retractable soft top switch
for 15 seconds twice.
The rear soft top closes the locking
hooks.
X
Close the retractable soft top com-
pletely.
X
Have the rear soft top checked at an
authorized smart center.
Replacing transmitter battery
Notes
The remote control’s transmitter battery is
almost spent when the turn signals flash
rapidly nine times in a row when locking
the vehicle.
i
If you do not replace the transmitter
battery, after about 100 more times you
will no longer be able to lock or unlock
the vehicle using the remote control.
X
Replace the transmitter battery.
or
X
Have the transmitter battery replaced at
an authorized smart center.
G
WARNING
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive
substances. Therefore keep the batteries
out of reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states/provinces
require sellers of batteries to accept old
batteries for recycling.
Replacing battery
Replacement battery: CR 2016 button cell
!
Replace the remote control’s transmit-
ter battery every two years at the latest.
Otherwise there is a danger of leakage.
The remote control could be damaged.
Replacing transmitter battery
177
>> Practical hints.
* optional
Z
X
Insert a suitable object such as a coin
into the slot at the eyelet of the key hous-
ing.
X
Carefully turn the coin until key housing
top half : is unlatched.
X
Open key housing top half : to the side.
X
Remove transmitter battery ; from the
board.
!
Check the polarity when inserting the
new transmitter battery. You could oth-
erwise damage parts of the electrical
system. When inserting the batteries,
make sure they are clean and free of lint.
X
Insert the new transmitter battery.
X
Press both halves of the key housing
together again.
X
Check the operation of the remote
control.
Replacing bulbs
About replacing bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
exterior lighting and signaling. It is
therefore essential that all bulbs and lamp
assemblies are in good working order at all
times.
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. Contact an author-
ized smart center for headlamp adjustment.
G
WARNING
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot.
Allow the lamp to cool down before changing
a bulb. Otherwise you could be burned if you
touch them.
Keep bulbs out of the reach of children.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
bulb can explode if you:
R
touch or move it when hot
R
drop the bulb
R
scratch the bulb
Wear eye and hand protection.
i
If the headlamps or front fog lamps* are
fogged up on the inside as a result of
high humidity, driving the vehicle a
distance with the lights on should clear
up the fogging.
Notes on bulb replacement:
R
Only use bulbs of the same type and with
the specified watt rating.
R
Switch the lights off before replacing a
bulb to prevent short circuits.
R
Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
handling bulbs.
R
Your hands should be dry and free of oil
and grease.
R
Avoid touching the glass of the bulb with
bare fingers.
R
If the newly installed bulb does not come
on, contact an authorized smart center.
R
Have the bulbs for the front fog lamps*
and the LED daytime running lamps*
replaced at an authorized smart center.
178
Replacing bulbs
>> Practical hints.
* optional
Overview bulbs
Front lamps
Headlamp Type
:
Low‑beam headlamp
H7 (55 W)
;
High‑beam headlamp
H7 (55 W)
=
Parking and side marker lamp
WY 5 W
?
Turn signal lamp
2357 A
Front fog lamp*
Type
:
Front fog lamp
H 11
Side turn signal lamp Type
:
Side turn signal lamp
WY 5 W
Replacing bulbs
179
>> Practical hints.
* optional
Z
Rear lamps
Tail lamp unit Type
:
Brake lamp/tail lamp/turn signal
lamp/side marker lamp
12 V 21/5 W
;
Reflector
-
=
Backup lamp
12 V 21 W
License plate lamps Type
:
License plate lamps
C 5 W
High‑mounted brake lamp Type
:
High‑mounted brake lamp
W 16 W
180
Replacing bulbs
>> Practical hints.
Replacing bulbs for front lamps
Before you start to replace a bulb for a
front lamp, do the following first:
X
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
$ (Y page 64).
X
Switch off the ignition.
X
Open the service flap (Y page 120).
Left headlamp, (right headlamp in reverse)
Parking and side marker lamp bulb
X
Removing:
Driver’s side: Turn bulb socket ? toward
the outside.
Passenger side: Turn bulb socket ?
toward the outside.
X
Pull bulb socket ? out of the headlamp
housing.
X
Pull the bulb out of bulb socket ?.
X
Installing: Insert the new bulb into bulb
socket ?.
X
Insert bulb socket ? into the headlamp
housing.
X
Driver side: Turn bulb socket ? toward
the inside.
Passenger side: Turn bulb socket ?
toward the inside.
Low‑beam headlamp bulb
X
Removing: Take off low‑beam headlamp
cover =.
X
Detach the electrical connector.
X
Bend the retainer spring end down and
forward until it unclips. Fold the
retainer spring back.
X
Pull the bulb out of the headlamp hous-
ing.
X
Installing: Insert the new bulb into the
headlamp housing.
X
Fold the retainer spring forward.
X
Bend the retainer spring end forward
then up and back to clip in.
X
Attach the electrical connector.
X
Reinstall low‑beam headlamp cover =.
High‑beam headlamp bulb
X
Removing: Take off high‑beam headlamp
cover ;.
X
Detach the electrical connector.
X
Tilt the bulb socket down and pull it out.
X
Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.
X
Installing: Insert the new bulb into the
bulb socket.
X
Fit the bulb so that the retaining lug of
the base plate is pointing up.
X
Press the bulb into the bulb socket until
it is fully engaged.
X
Attach the electrical connector.
X
Reinstall high‑beam headlamp cover ;.
Front turn signal lamp bulb
X
Removing: Turn bulb socket : counter-
clockwise by a quarter of turn and pull it
out of the headlamp housing.
X
Press gently onto the bulb and turn it
counterclockwise.
X
Pull the bulb out of bulb socket :.
X
Installing: Insert the new bulb into bulb
socket :.
X
Press gently onto the bulb and turn it
clockwise.
X
Insert bulb socket : into the headlamp
housing.
Replacing bulbs
181
>> Practical hints.
Z
The arrow on bulb socket : must be in
line with the line on the headlamp hous-
ing.
X
Turn bulb socket : clockwise by a quar-
ter of turn.
Side turn signal lamp bulb
X
Removing: Open the door on the corre-
sponding side.
X
Press on retaining lug : in the direc-
tion of the arrow until the side turn sig-
nal lamp housing disengages.
X
Close the door.
X
Use a suitable tool to loosen the side turn
signal lamp housing from the fender.
X
Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
and pull it out of the side turn signal
lamp housing.
X
Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.
X
Installing: Insert the new bulb into the
bulb socket.
X
Insert the bulb socket into the side turn
signal lamp housing and turn the bulb
socket clockwise.
X
Fit the side turn signal lamp housing
onto the fender.
X
Press gently onto the side turn signal
lamp housing.
The side turn signal lamp housing must
audibly engage.
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear
lamp, do the following first:
X
Turn exterior lamp switch to position
$ (Y page 64).
X
Switch off the ignition.
Tail lamp unit
X
Removing:
Coupé: Open the upper tailgate.
X
Open the lower tailgate.
X
Cabriolet: Open the rear soft top
(Y page 73).
X
Remove the side cover in the cargo com-
partment on the corresponding side.
X
Fold the damping material forward, if
necessary.
Left bulb carrier illustrated as example
:
Retaining tab
;
Electrical connector
X
Press retaining tab : in the center of
the bulb carrier upwards.
X
Pull the bulb carrier out of the tail lamp
housing.
182
Replacing bulbs
>> Practical hints.
Left bulb carrier with bulb sockets (right bulb
carrier in reverse)
:
Retaining tab
=
Brake, tail, turn signal and side marker
lamp bulb
?
Backup lamp bulb
X
Depending on which bulb needs to be
replaced, press gently onto bulb =
or ? and turn it counterclockwise.
X
Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.
X
Installing: Insert the new bulb into the
bulb socket.
X
Press gently onto the bulb and turn it
clockwise until it engages.
X
Insert the bulb carrier into the tail lamp
housing.
X
Press gently onto the bulb carrier.
Let retaining tab : engage.
X
Fold the damping material backward, if
necessary.
X
Reinstall the side cover in the cargo
compartment.
High-mounted brake lamp
X
Removing: Unscrew retaining screws :.
X
Remove high-mounted brake lamp ?.
X
Detach electrical connector ; from bulb
socket =.
X
Turn the bulb counterclockwise and pull
it out of its socket.
X
Installing: Install in the reverse order.
License plate lamps
G
WARNING
High outside temperature, stop-and-go
traffic, driving on long uphill grades, or
driving at high engine speed may increase
the temperature in the engine compart-
ment. Therefore the area around the air
slots in the rear apron may be hot. Let the
engine cool off before touching this area
to prevent burns.
Replacing bulbs
183
>> Practical hints.
Z
X
Use a suitable tool to loosen the corre-
sponding license plate lamp unit at
jacking point :.
X
Carefully unclip the license plate lamp
unit.
X
Detach electrical connectors ;.
X
Remove bulb =.
X
Insert the new bulb.
X
Attach electrical connectors ;.
X
Fit the license plate lamp unit on the
right and press gently on the left.
The license plate lamp unit must audibly
engage.
Replacing interior lighting lamps
A 12 V/10 W bulb is required.
X
Removing: Use a flat object to pry the
lamp lens : off from the passenger side.
X
Detach electrical connector ; from the
interior lamp.
X
Remove bulb = from mount ?.
X
Installing: Insert the new bulb.
X
Attach electrical connector ; to the
interior lamp.
X
Fit the lamp lens on the left in the open-
ing and press gently on the right.
The lamp lens must audibly engage.
Replacing wiper blades
About replacing wiper blades
G
WARNING
For safety reasons, switch off the wipers
and remove the key from the starter switch
before replacing a wiper blade. The wind-
shield wipers could otherwise be set in
motion and cause injury.
G
WARNING
Wiper blades are components that are sub-
ject to wear and tear. Replace the wiper
blades at least twice a year, preferably in
the spring and fall. Otherwise the windows
will not be properly wiped. As a result, you
may not be able to observe surrounding
traffic conditions and could cause an acci-
dent.
!
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
wiper arm back. If released, the force of
the impact from the windshield wiper
184
Replacing wiper blades
>> Practical hints.
tensioning spring could crack the wind-
shield.
Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the
windshield glass without a wiper blade
inserted.
We recommend that you have this work
carried out at an authorized smart
center.
To ensure proper visibility
R
it is vital that you have wiper blades that
are in perfect shape
R
clean the wiper blades regularly with a
cleaning agent
R
remove any tough dirt stains with a
sponge or brush
Windshield wiper blades
!
Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts.
They could tear.
Removing
X
Remove the key from the starter switch.
X
Fold wiper arm ? away from the wind-
shield until it snaps into place.
X
Press on retaining springs ; on both
sides of wiper blade :.
X
Fold wiper blade : away from wiper
arm ? in direction of arrow =.
X
Detach wiper blade : in direction of
arrow A.
Installing
X
With guide tab A sliding into opening
B, attach new wiper blade : onto the
wiper arm.
X
Fold wiper blade : towards the wiper
arm in direction of arrow =.
Retaining springs ; must audibly
engage in attachment ?.
X
Check whether wiper blade : is securely
fastened.
X
Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on
the windshield.
Make sure to hold on to the wiper when
folding it back.
!
Make sure the wiper blades are properly
installed. Improperly installed wiper
blades may cause windshield damage.
Rear window wiper blade
Replacing wiper blades
185
>> Practical hints.
Z
X
Removing: Fold the wiper arm away from
the rear window until you feel it engage.
X
Fold wiper blade : away from the wiper
arm in direction of arrow ; until it
disengages from its mounting.
X
Detach wiper blade :.
X
Installing: Push the new wiper blade onto
the wiper arm until you feel it engage.
X
Fold the wiper blade into a position par-
allel to the wiper arm.
X
Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on
the rear window.
Make sure to hold on to the wiper when
folding the wiper arm back.
!
Make sure the wiper blade is properly
installed. An improperly installed
wiper blade may cause rear window dam-
age.
Adjusting the washer jet nozzles
:
Front washer jet nozzles
;
Rear washer jet nozzles
X
Adjusting: Use a needle to move washer
jet nozzles : or ; left, right, up, or
down.
i
Check the setting of the washer jet noz-
zles at regular intervals. The washer jet
nozzles are correctly set when the water
jet hits the windshield or the rear win-
dow approximately in the center.
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
Upon experiencing any type of problem
with the vehicle’s tires, switch on the haz-
ard warning flasher, carefully slow down
and exit the roadway in a cautious manner.
X
Park the vehicle at a safe distance from
moving traffic on a hard, flat surface
when possible.
X
Make sure the tire valve of the damaged
tire is located below the horizontal axle
of the wheel hub.
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Turn the steering wheel so that the front
wheels are in a straight ahead position.
X
Move the gear selector lever to park
position P.
X
Turn off the engine.
X
Remove the key from the starter switch
and take the key with you.
i
Open door only when conditions are safe
to do so.
X
Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a
safe distance from the roadway.
Using the tire repair kit
!
Depending on the type of damage on the
tire, the tire sealant could damage the
sensor of the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)*. Such damage is not cov-
ered by the smart Limited Warranty.
When having the damaged tire replaced,
also have the TPMS sensors* checked for
proper function. When the sensor is dam-
aged, the TPMS* will not function prop-
erly. The sensor must then be replaced at
an authorized smart center as soon as
possible.
i
Depending on production date of your
vehicle, it will be equipped with version
1 or version 2 of the tire repair kit.
Please make sure to refer to the descrip-
186
Flat tire
>> Practical hints.
* optional
tion of the tire repair kit in your vehicle
before sealing a tire.
The tire repair kit can be used to seal
punctures of up to approximately 0.16 in
(4 mm) on the tire tread.
The tire repair kit enables you to drive on
the sealed tire to the nearest authorized
smart center.
X
You should have the sealed tire replaced
at an authorized smart center.
G
WARNING
Take care not to allow the contents of the
tire sealant to come in contact with hair,
eyes or clothing. The tire sealant is harm-
ful if inhaled, swallowed or absorbed
through the skin - causes skin, eye and res-
piratory irritation. Wear gloves while
using this product if they are available.
Any contact with eyes or skin should be
flushed immediately with plenty of water.
If clothing comes in contact with the tire
sealant, change clothing as soon as possi-
ble.
In case of allergic reaction or rash, consult
a physician immediately.
Notes
R
Small tire punctures, particularly those
in the tread, can be sealed with the tire
sealant.
R
The tire sealant can be used in ambient
temperatures from ‑4¦ (‑20¥) to
104¦ (+40¥).
R
Do not remove any foreign objects such as
nails or screws that have penetrated the
tire.
R
Do not use the tire sealant if the tire has
been damaged by being driven when
insufficiently inflated (e.g. bumps,
cuts, cracks etc. on the tire).
R
Allow escaped tire sealant to dry, then
peel it off.
R
Immediately wash all painted surfaces
that came into contact with the tire seal-
ant using a damp cloth.
R
Avoid skin and eye contact with the tire
sealant.
R
Do not swallow the tire sealant.
R
Allow the tire sealant that is inside the
damaged tire to dry and dispose of
together with the tire.
R
Do not use the tire sealant after the expi-
ration date has elapsed (see top of con-
tainer).
Instead, have it replaced at an author-
ized smart center.
G
WARNING
The tire sealant is a limited repair device.
The tire sealant cannot be used for cuts or
punctures larger than approximately
0.16 in (4 mm) and tire damage caused by
driving with extremely low tire inflation
pressure, or on a flat tire, or a damaged
wheel.
Do not drive the vehicle under such cir-
cumstances.
If you are unsure of the condition of the tire
or have any question whatsoever about its
suitability for driving contact the nearest
smart center for assistance or call Road-
side Assistance.
G
WARNING
Please review the instructions below for
using the tire repair kit. If you are not
confident that you can competently follow
the instructions for using this kit, do not
use the kit, but instead call for Roadside
Assistance.
G
WARNING
Keep the tire sealant out of reach of chil-
dren. If swallowed, rinse mouth immedi-
ately with plenty of water and drink plenty
of water.
Do not induce vomiting!
Consult a physician immediately.
Flat tire
187
>> Practical hints.
Z
Keep away from open flame, heat source or
sparks. Do not smoke.
Sealing a tire (Version 1)
X
Take the tire repair kit from the
passenger footwell (Y page 158).
X
Open the tire repair kit lid.
:
Flange lid
;
Pressure gauge
=
Vent screw
?
Filler hose with stopper
A
Operating instructions label
B
Electrical plug
C
Electric air pump switch
D
Sticker
E
Tire sealant container
X
Remove sticker D from the tire repair
kit.
X
Attach sticker D where it will be easily
seen by the driver on the instrument
cluster.
X
Unwind electrical plug B and filler
hose ?.
X
Unscrew flange lid :.
X
Unscrew the lid of tire sealant container
E. Make sure not to damage the aluminum
seal.
X
Screw tire sealant container E onto
flange F.
Make sure the container is threaded cor-
rectly onto the flange. This punctures the
aluminum seal of the tire sealant con-
tainer.
X
Unscrew the valve cap from the tire valve
of the damaged tire.
X
Close vent screw =.
X
Pull off the stopper of filler hose ?.
188
Flat tire
>> Practical hints.
X
Screw the end of filler hose ? onto tire
valve G.
X
Insert electrical plug B into the aux-
iliary power outlet (Y page 114).
X
Insert the key in the starter switch and
turn it to position 1.
i
The vehicle’s battery is drained by use
of the electric air pump. You should
therefore keep the engine running — in
the open air — while inflating the tire.
X
Press I on electric air pump switch C.
The electric air pump is switched on and
inflates the tire.
i
First, the sealant is pumped into the
tire. The pressure may briefly increase
to a high value. This is normal and not an
indication of a malfunction. Do not
switch off the electric air pump.
X
Let the electric air pump inflate the tire
for a maximum of ten minutes.
Pressure gauge ; must display at least
180 kPa (1.8 bar, 26 psi).
!
Do not operate the electric air pump
longer than ten minutes without inter-
ruption. Otherwise it may overheat.
You may operate the electrical air pump
again after it has cooled off.
X
If a tire inflation pressure of at least
180 kPa (1.8 bar, 26 psi) is not attained,
turn off the electric air pump by press-
ing 0 on electric air pump switch C.
X
Unscrew the end of filler hose ? from
tire valve G.
X
After clearing the area around the vehi-
cle of people and obstacles, drive vehi-
cle back or forth very slowly approx-
imately 30 ft (10 m).
This serves to better distribute the tire
sealant material inside the tire.
X
Screw the end of filler hose ? onto tire
valve G.
X
Inflate the tire again.
G
WARNING
If a tire inflation pressure of
180 kPa (1.8 bar, 26 psi) is not attained, the
tire is too severely damaged for the tire
sealant to provide a reliable tire repair.
In this case, the tire sealant cannot prop-
erly seal the tire.
Do not drive the vehicle.
Contact the nearest smart center for assis-
tance or call Roadside Assistance.
X
After attaining a tire inflation pressure
of at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar, 26 psi), press
0 on electric air pump switch C.
The electric air pump is switched off.
X
Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 0.
X
Unscrew the end of filler hose ? from
tire valve G.
X
Plug filler hose with the stopper.
X
Tire sealant container E remains
screwed onto flange F.
Flat tire
189
>> Practical hints.
Z
X
Place the tire repair kit securely in the
vehicle.
X
Drive off immediately.
The tire sealant will distribute itself
evenly inside the tire.
G
WARNING
Do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h). A tire sealant repair is not
designed to operate at higher speeds.
The sticker must be attached on the instru-
ment cluster where it will be easily seen by
the driver.
Vehicle handling characteristics of a tire
sealant repaired tire may change. Adapt
your driving accordingly.
X
After driving for about 1.8 miles (3 km)
or ten minutes, stop and exit the vehicle
taking all of the appropriate safety pre-
cautions.
X
Take the tire repair kit from the vehicle.
X
Screw the end of filler hose ? onto tire
valve G.
X
Check the tire inflation pressure using
pressure gauge ;.
G
WARNING
If tire inflation pressure has fallen below
130 kPa (1.3 bar, 19 psi) do not continue to
drive the vehicle.
Park your vehicle safely away from the
roadway and contact the nearest smart
center or call Roadside Assistance.
Have the damaged tire replaced.
X
If the tire inflation pressure is at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar, 19 psi), inflate or deflate
the tire to correct tire inflation pres-
sure (see Tire and Loading Information
placard located on the driver’s door
B‑pillar).
R
To increase the tire inflation pres-
sure: Switch on the electric air pump.
R
To decrease the tire inflation pres-
sure: Open vent screw =. Recheck the
tire inflation pressure with the elec-
tric air pump’s pressure gauge.
X
After checking the tire inflation pres-
sure, unscrew the end of filler hose ?
from tire valve G.
X
Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve.
X
Plug filler hose with the stopper.
X
Place the tire repair kit securely in the
vehicle.
!
The manufacturer is unable to guaran-
tee that all tire punctures can be
repaired with the tire repair kit, in par-
ticular cuts or perforations larger than
approximately 0.16 in (4 mm) or away from
the tire’s tread. The manufacturer is not
liable for damage sustained through
improper use of the tire repair kit.
G
WARNING
Follow recommended tire inflation pres-
sures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated
tires wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel econ-
omy, and are more likely to fail from being
overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated
tires can adversely affect handling and
ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase
stopping distance, and result in sudden
deflation (blowout) because they are more
likely to become punctured or damaged by
road debris, potholes etc.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the
Tire and Loading Information placard on
the driver’s door B‑pillar. Overloading the
tires can overheat them, possibly causing
a blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
190
Flat tire
>> Practical hints.
X
Drive to the nearest authorized smart
center, to have the damaged tire
replaced.
X
Contact an authorized smart center as
soon as possible to obtain a new filler
hose and a new tire sealant container.
X
Bring used tire sealant materials to an
authorized smart center for proper dis-
posal.
X
Replace your tire sealant container
every 4 years. Replacement containers
are available at any authorized smart
center.
G
WARNING
After changing a tire, contact a smart
center to make sure the bolts holding the
wheel to the car are tight enough. Other-
wise, the wheels could come off. Each bolt
should be tightened to a torque of 81 lb‑ft
(110 Nm).
Sealing a tire (Version 2)
X
Take the tire repair kit from the
passenger footwell (Y page 158).
X
Take electrical plug = and filler hose
B from the bottom of the electric air
pump housing.
X
Engage the yellow plug of filler hose B
in the opening in yellow closure cap A.
X
With the O-ring seals towards the elec-
tric air pump housing, insert yellow clo-
sure cap A into fixture ;.
X
Push tire sealant container : into fix-
ture ; until both hooks of yellow closure
cap A engage.
X
Unscrew the valve cap from tire valve
C of the damaged tire.
X
Screw the end of filler hose B onto tire
valve C.
X
Insert electrical plug = into the aux-
iliary power outlet (Y page 114).
X
Insert the key in the starter switch and
turn it to position 1.
i
The vehicle’s battery is drained by use
of the electric air pump. You should
therefore keep the engine running — in
the open air — while inflating the tire.
X
Press ON on electric air pump switch ?.
The electric air pump is switched on and
inflates the tire.
i
First, the sealant is pumped into the
tire. The pressure may briefly increase
to a high value. This is normal and not an
indication of a malfunction. Do not
switch off the electric air pump.
X
Let the electric air pump inflate the tire
for a maximum of ten minutes.
The pressure gauge must display at least
200 kpa (2.0 bar, 29 psi).
!
Do not operate the electric air pump
longer than ten minutes without inter-
ruption. Otherwise it may overheat.
Flat tire
191
>> Practical hints.
Z
You may operate the electrical air pump
again after it has cooled off.
X
If a tire inflation pressure of at least
200 kpa (2.0 bar, 29 psi) is not attained,
turn off the electric air pump by press-
ing OFF on electric air pump switch ?.
X
Unscrew the end of filler hose ? from
tire valve C.
X
After clearing the area around the vehi-
cle of people and obstacles, drive vehi-
cle back or forth very slowly approx-
imately 30 ft (10 m).
This serves to better distribute the tire
sealant material inside the tire.
X
Screw the end of filler hose ? onto tire
valve C.
X
Inflate the tire again.
G
WARNING
If a tire inflation pressure of
200 kPa (2.0 bar, 29 psi) is not attained, the
tire is too severely damaged for the tire
sealant to provide a reliable tire repair.
In this case, the tire sealant cannot prop-
erly seal the tire.
Do not drive the vehicle.
Contact the nearest smart center for assis-
tance or call Roadside Assistance.
X
After attaining a tire inflation pressure
of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar, 29 psi), press
OFF on electric air pump switch ?.
The electric air pump is switched off.
X
Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 0.
X
Unscrew the end of filler hose ? from
tire valve C.
X
Place the tire repair kit securely in the
vehicle.
X
Drive off immediately.
The tire sealant will distribute itself
evenly inside the tire.
G
WARNING
Do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h). A tire sealant repair is not
designed to operate at higher speeds.
The sticker must be attached on the instru-
ment cluster where it will be easily seen by
the driver.
Vehicle handling characteristics of a tire
sealant repaired tire may change. Adapt
your driving accordingly.
X
After driving for about 1.8 miles (3 km)
or ten minutes, stop and exit the vehicle
taking all of the appropriate safety pre-
cautions.
X
Take the tire repair kit from the vehicle.
X
Screw the end of filler hose ? onto tire
valve C.
X
Check the tire inflation pressure using
pressure gauge E.
G
WARNING
If tire inflation pressure has fallen below
130 kPa (1.3 bar, 19 psi) do not continue to
drive the vehicle.
Park your vehicle safely away from the
roadway and contact the nearest smart
center or call Roadside Assistance.
Have the damaged tire replaced.
X
If the tire inflation pressure is at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar, 19 psi), inflate or deflate
the tire to correct tire inflation pres-
sure (see Tire and Loading Information
192
Flat tire
>> Practical hints.
placard located on the driver’s door
B‑pillar).
R
To increase the tire inflation pres-
sure: Switch on the electric air pump.
R
To decrease the tire inflation pres-
sure: Press deflate button D. Recheck
the tire inflation pressure with the
electric air pump’s pressure gauge
E.
X
When the tire inflation pressure is cor-
rect, unscrew the end of filler hose ?
from tire valve C.
X
Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve.
X
To detach tire sealant container : from
the electric air pump, press both
latches.
X
Pull tire sealant container : out of fix-
ture ;.
Filler hose ? remains on tire sealant
container :.
X
Place the tire repair kit securely in the
vehicle.
!
The manufacturer is unable to guaran-
tee that all tire punctures can be
repaired with the tire repair kit, in par-
ticular cuts or perforations larger than
approximately 0.16 in (4 mm) or away from
the tire’s tread. The manufacturer is not
liable for damage sustained through
improper use of the tire repair kit.
G
WARNING
Follow recommended tire inflation pres-
sures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated
tires wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel econ-
omy, and are more likely to fail from being
overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated
tires can adversely affect handling and
ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase
stopping distance, and result in sudden
deflation (blowout) because they are more
likely to become punctured or damaged by
road debris, potholes etc.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the
Tire and Loading Information placard on
the driver’s door B‑pillar. Overloading the
tires can overheat them, possibly causing
a blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
X
Drive to the nearest authorized smart
center, to have the damaged tire
replaced.
X
Contact an authorized smart center as
soon as possible to obtain a new filler
hose and a new tire sealant container.
X
Bring used tire sealant materials to an
authorized smart center for proper dis-
posal.
X
Replace your tire sealant container
every 4 years. Replacement containers
are available at any authorized smart
center.
G
WARNING
After changing a tire, contact a smart
center to make sure the bolts holding the
wheel to the car are tight enough. Other-
wise, the wheels could come off. Each bolt
should be tightened to a torque of 81 lb‑ft
(110 Nm).
Flat tire
193
>> Practical hints.
Z
Wheel change
Preparing the vehicle
X
Park the vehicle on a hard, flat surface
when possible.
X
Turn on the hazard warning flasher.
X
Turn the steering wheel so that the front
wheels are in a straight-ahead position.
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Move the gear selector lever to park
position P.
X
Turn off the engine.
X
Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a
safe distance from the roadway.
Removing the wheel
G
WARNING
When jacking up the vehicle, only use a
suitable jack. Observe the manufacturer’s
safety instructions.
The jack must be designed for jacking up
this vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle.
The jack is intended only for lifting the
vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not
suited for performing maintenance work
under the vehicle. To help avoid personal
injury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle
during a wheel change.
Never get beneath the vehicle while it is
supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet
away from the area under the lifted vehicle.
Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under
the vehicle.
Always firmly engage the parking brake and
block the wheels with wheel chocks or other
sizeable objects before raising the vehi-
cle with the jack. Do not release the parking
brake while the vehicle is raised.
Make sure the ground on which the vehicle
is standing and where you place the jack is
solid, level and not slippery. If necessary,
use a large underlay. On slippery surfaces,
such as tiled floors, you should use a non-
slip underlay, for example a rubber mat.
Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects
to support the jack. Otherwise the jack may
not be able to achieve its load-bearing
capacity if it is not at its full height.
The jack must always be vertical when in
use. Always try to use the jack on level sur-
face. If you do not position the jack cor-
rectly, the vehicle can fall off the jack and
seriously or fatally injure you or others.
Never start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
Also observe the notes on the jack.
X
Make sure to have a suitable jack
18
, wheel
wrench
18
and wheel chock
18
.
Contact an authorized smart center for
information on which jack and wheel
wrench are required.
X
Prepare the vehicle as described
(Y page 194).
X
Make sure the surface is level.
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
blocking wheels with wheel chocks or other
sizeable objects:
X
Place one wheel chock or other sizeable
object in front of and another wheel
chock or other sizeable object behind
the wheel that is diagonally opposite to
the wheel being changed.
18
Not included and not available as factory equipment.
194
Wheel change
>> Practical hints.
Steel rim with wheel cover
X
Vehicles with wheel cover on steel rim:
Pull the wheel cover off of the rim.
If necessary, use a suitable tool to pry
the wheel cover off.
X
On wheel to be changed, loosen but do not
yet remove the wheel bolts (approx-
imately one full turn with wheel wrench).
Steel rim with wheel trim cap
X
Vehicles with wheel trim cap on steel
rim: On wheel to be changed, loosen but
do not yet remove the wheel bolts
(approximately one full turn with wheel
wrench).
X
Take the wheel trim cap off.
X
Position jack ; under take-up
bracket : so that it is always vertical
as seen from the side, even if the vehicle
is parked on an incline.
The take-up brackets are identified by
the embossed recesses in the area of the
door sills.
!
Only position the jack on the desig-
nated take-up brackets. Otherwise, the
vehicle could be damaged.
X
Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a
maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.
X
Unscrew and remove the wheel bolts.
!
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
This could result in damage to the wheel
bolts and wheel hub threads.
X
Remove the wheel.
Mounting the wheel
G
WARNING
Always replace wheel bolts that are dam-
aged or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be
repaired immediately. Do not continue to
drive under these circumstances! Contact
an authorized smart center or call Roadside
Assistance.
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tight-
ened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to
Wheel change
195
>> Practical hints.
Z
come off. This could cause an accident. Be
sure to use the correct wheel bolts.
G
WARNING
Only use genuine smart wheel bolts. Other
wheel bolts may come loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the
vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle
could fall off the jack.
X
Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel
hub.
!
To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
against hub and hold it there while
installing first wheel bolt.
X
Guide the wheel onto the wheel hub and
push it on.
X
Insert two wheel bolts and tighten them
slightly.
X
Vehicles with wheel trim cap on steel
rim: Attach the wheel trim cap so that it
is held by the two wheel bolts.
X
Install last wheel bolt and tighten it
slightly.
X
Lower the vehicle until the vehicle is
resting fully on its own weight.
X
Remove the jack.
X
Tighten the wheel bolts. Observe a tight-
ening torque of 80 lb-ft (110 Nm).
G
WARNING
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque
of 80 lb-ft (110 Nm).
Steel rim with wheel cover
X
Vehicles with wheel cover on steel rim:
Position wheel cover aperture : so
valve ; fits through.
X
Push the wheel cover evenly onto the
wheel rim with both hands.
X
Check that the wheel cover is fixed
securely to the wheel rim.
i
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)* only functions on wheels that are
equipped with the proper electronic
sensors (Y page 127).
Battery
About the battery
Your vehicle’s battery is located in the
passenger footwell below the footrest
(Y page 198).
The battery should always be sufficiently
charged in order to achieve its rated
service life. Refer to the Scheduled Main-
tenance Guide (USA only) or the Service
booklet (Canada only) for battery mainte-
nance intervals.
If you use your vehicle mostly for short-
distance trips, you will need to have the
battery charge checked more frequently.
When replacing the battery, always use bat-
teries approved by smart.
Battery: 12 V and 42 Ah
196
Battery
>> Practical hints.
* optional
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time, consult an
authorized smart center about steps you
need to observe.
G
WARNING
Observe all safety instructions and pre-
cautions when handling automotive batter-
ies.
Risk of explosion.
Fire, open flames and
smoking are prohibited
when handling batteries.
Avoid creating sparks.
Battery acid is caustic.
Do not allow it to come
into contact with skin,
eyes or clothing.
Wear suitable protective
clothing, especially
gloves, apron and face-
guard.
Wear eye protection.
Rinse any acid spills
immediately with clear
water. Contact a physician
if necessary.
Keep children away.
Follow the instructions in
this Operator’s Manual.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
G
WARNING
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in severe injury or death.
Observe all safety instructions and pre-
cautions when handling automotive batter-
ies.
Never lean over batteries while connect-
ing, you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with
eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does,
immediately flush affected area with water
and seek medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking, etc.
G
WARNING
Do not place any metal objects on a battery.
You could otherwise cause a short circuit
and the battery’s highly flammable chemi-
cals could ignite.
Never allow any metal object to contact both
battery terminals or the positive terminal
and the vehicle body at the same time. This
might short circuit the battery and ignite
the highly flammable and explosive hydro-
gen gas generated by the battery, causing
serious personal injury.
G
WARNING
Keep flames or sparks away from battery,
avoid improper connection of jumper
cables, smoking, etc.
R
When disconnecting the battery, always
disconnect the negative terminal first,
followed by positive terminal.
R
When connecting the battery, always con-
nect the positive terminal first, fol-
lowed by the negative terminal.
R
Do not loosen or disconnect the battery
terminal clips while the engine is run-
ning or the key is in the starter switch.
Battery
197
>> Practical hints.
Z
!
Never loosen or detach battery terminal
clamps while the engine is running or the
key is in the starter switch. Otherwise
the alternator and other electronic com-
ponents could be severely damaged.
Have the battery checked regularly at an
authorized smart center.
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for main-
tenance intervals or contact an author-
ized smart center for further informa-
tion.
!
Never invert the terminal connections!
Disconnecting, removing, charging,
reinstalling and reconnecting the bat-
tery
Disconnecting the battery
i If the battery is disconnected or dis-
charged
R
the key will not turn in the starter
switch
R
the automatic transmission will
remain in park position P
For more information see “Jump start-
ing” (Y page 199).
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Move the gear selector lever to park
position P.
X
Turn off all electrical accessories.
X
Turn off the engine.
X
Open the passenger door.
X
Move the passenger seat to the rear as far
as possible.
X
Unscrew the carpet holder in the
passenger footwell (Y page 158).
X
Lift the carpet.
X
Unscrew fastening screw ; counter-
clockwise.
X
Pull footrest : sideways out of the vehi-
cle.
X
Read and observe safety instructions and
precautions (Y page 196).
!
Always disconnect the battery in the
order described below. Otherwise the
vehicle’s electronics can be damaged.
X
Disconnect the battery negative lead
from negative terminal =.
Make sure the negative lead does not
come into contact with the positive lead.
X
Remove cover ? from the positive ter-
minal.
X
Disconnect the battery positive lead.
Removing the battery
X
Unscrew battery mount A.
X
Remove the battery support and bracket.
X
Pull out the ventilation hose from the
battery (depending on battery arrange-
198
Battery
>> Practical hints.
ment in your vehicle model, the ventila-
tion hose is located either on the left or
right side of the battery).
X
Remove the battery.
Charging the battery
G
WARNING
Avoid creating sparks when charging the
battery as escaping gases are flammable.
Keep open flames away from the battery and
do not smoke.
Do not touch the battery terminal with metal
objects and do not remove the battery
charger’s terminal clamps until the battery
charger has been switched off and no fur-
ther gas is being discharged by the bat-
teries.
Only charge the battery in a well ventilated
area.
There is a risk of acid burns during the
charging procedure due to the gases which
escape from the battery. Do not lean over
the battery when it is being charged.
G
WARNING
Never charge a battery while still installed
in the vehicle. Gases may escape during
charging and cause explosions that may
result in paint damage, corrosion or per-
sonal injury.
X
Charge battery in accordance with the
instructions of the battery charger man-
ufacturer.
!
Only use chargers of a correct and suit-
able voltage.
!
Never attempt to recharge a frozen bat-
tery. Have the battery checked at a smart
center. The battery housing could be
damaged.
Reinstalling the battery
X
Reinstall the charged battery. Follow the
previously described steps in reverse
order.
!
The battery, its filler caps and the ven-
tilation hose must always be securely
installed when the vehicle is in opera-
tion.
Reconnecting the battery
!
Always connect the battery in the order
described below. Otherwise the vehi-
cle’s electronics can be damaged.
X
Turn off all electrical accessories.
X
Remove the key from the starter switch.
!
Never invert the terminal connections!
X
Connect the battery positive lead and
fasten cover ? (Y page 198).
X
Connect battery negative lead =
(Y page 198).
i
After battery power (e.g. due to recon-
nection) was interrupted, you will have
to set the clock (Y page 88).
i
Have the battery’s charge status and
acid level checked at the start of the cold
season at a smart center.
Jump starting
Notes
G
WARNING
Failure to follow these directions will
cause damage to the electronic components,
and can lead to a battery explosion and
severe injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting
or jump starting, you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with
eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does,
Jump starting
199
>> Practical hints.
Z
immediately flush affected area with
water, and seek medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and very explosive.
Keep flames or sparks away from battery,
avoid improper connection of jumper
cables, smoking, etc.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery
can result in it exploding, causing per-
sonal injury.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
!
Do not tow‑start vehicle. You could oth-
erwise seriously damage the transmis-
sion which is not covered by the smart
Limited Warranty.
!
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting
attempts.
Do not attempt to start the engine using
a battery quick charge unit.
If the engine does not run after several
unsuccessful starting attempts, have it
checked at the nearest authorized smart
center.
Excessive unburned fuel generated by
repeated failed starting attempts may
damage the catalytic converter and may
present a fire risk.
Make sure the jumper cables do not have
loose or missing insulation.
Make sure the cable clamps do not touch
any other metal part while the other end
is still attached to a battery.
If the battery is discharged, the engine can
be started with jumper cables and the fully
charged battery of another vehicle or an
equivalent starter pack. Observe the fol-
lowing:
R
Access to the battery is not possible on
all vehicles. If you cannot access the
battery in your vehicle provide jump
start power by an external battery or
starter pack.
R
Jump starting should only be performed
when the engine and catalytic converter
are cold.
R
Do not start the engine if the battery is
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
R
Only jump start from batteries with the
same voltage rating (12 V). Jump starting
with a more powerful battery could dam-
age the vehicle’s electrical system. Such
damage will not be covered by the smart
Limited Warranty.
R
Only use jumper cables with sufficient
cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.
R
Always make sure the jumper cables are
not on or near pulleys, fans or other parts
that move when an engine is started or
running.
R
Should the battery be drained com-
pletely, let the donating power source
charge the vehicle for several minutes
before reattempting the starting proc-
ess.
G
WARNING
Keep flames or sparks away from battery. Do
not smoke.
Observe all safety instructions and pre-
cautions when handling automotive batter-
ies.
200
Jump starting
>> Practical hints.
Jump start assistance
Your vehicle’s battery is located in the passenger footwell below the footrest
(Y page 198).
For jump starting, use the terminals of the battery, keeping the leads connected.
X
Make sure the two vehicles do not touch.
X
Switch off all electrical consumers.
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Move the gear selector lever to park position P.
X
Turn off the engine.
X
Get access to the battery in the passenger footwell (Y page 198).
X
Remove the positive terminal cover.
Position A represents the charged battery of another vehicle or an equivalent starter
pack.
!
Never invert the terminal connections!
X
Connect positive terminal : of charged battery A with positive terminal ; of dis-
charged battery B with a jumper cable. Clamp the jumper cable to positive termi-
nal : of charged battery A first.
X
Start the engine of the vehicle with charged battery A and run at idle speed.
X
Connect negative terminal = of charged battery A with negative terminal ? of dis-
charged battery B with a jumper cable. Clamp the jumper cable to negative terminal
= of charged battery A first.
X
Start the engine of the vehicle with discharged battery B and run at idle speed. You
can now switch on the electrical consumers. Do not switch on the headlamps under any
circumstances.
Jump starting
201
>> Practical hints.
Z
X
Remove the jumper cables from negative terminals = and ? first.
X
Remove the jumper cables from positive terminals : and ;.
You can now switch on the headlamps.
X
Remount the positive terminal cover.
X
Have the battery checked at the nearest authorized smart center.
Towing
About towing
This section offers information on towing
methods for breakdown situations, emer-
gency towing, and flat towing smart vehi-
cles.
Recommended towing method - Break-
down situation
!
To prevent damage during transport, do
not tie down the vehicle by its chassis or
suspension parts — use only wheel straps
to position and hold down the vehicle.
Improper tie down on a flatbed carrier
truck or trailer can damage suspension
parts and body panels.
smart recommends that the vehicle be
transported with all wheels off the ground
using a flatbed carrier truck or appropri-
ate wheel lift/dolly equipment.
X
Switch off the tow‑away protection* and
interior motion sensor* (Y page 49).
Emergency towing
When circumstances do not permit the rec-
ommended towing method, the vehicle may
be towed with all wheels on the ground
using a strap or tow bar connected to
another vehicle. Only tow the vehicle as far
as necessary to have the vehicle moved to a
safe location where the recommended tow-
ing method can be employed.
G
WARNING
If circumstances require towing the vehi-
cle with all wheels on the ground, always tow
with a tow bar if:
R
the engine will not run
R
there is a malfunction in the brake sys-
tem
R
there is a malfunction in the power sup-
ply or in the vehicle’s electrical system
A tow bar is necessary to adequately control
the towed vehicle.
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, make sure the gear selector
lever is in neutral position N and the igni-
tion is switched off.
G
WARNING
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steer-
ing* systems. In this case, it is important
to keep in mind that a considerably higher
degree of effort is necessary to brake and
steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving
accordingly.
!
Do not tow the vehicle with the front
axle raised. Doing so may cause serious
damage to the brake system which is not
covered by the smart Limited Warranty.
!
Before towing the vehicle observe the
following instructions:
R
Do not tow with sling-type equipment
attached to suspension parts. This may
cause damage to the radiator and other
supports if towing on a bumpy road.
R
Towing the vehicle should only be done
using the properly installed towing
202
Towing
>> Practical hints.
* optional
eye bolt. Never attach a tow cable, tow
rope, or tow rod to the vehicle chassis,
frame, or suspension parts.
!
Make sure the ignition is switched off
while towing the vehicle. Doing other-
wise may result in
R
the ESP
®
being activated. Active brak-
ing action through the ESP
®
may ser-
iously damage the brake system which
is not covered by the smart Limited
Warranty.
R
a discharged battery.
!
Make sure the gear selector lever is in
neutral position N while towing the
vehicle. Doing otherwise may result in
significant drive train damage.
!
Towing the vehicle with a luggage
rack* mounted is not permissible. The
vehicle must not be towed by the luggage
rack*.
i
If the battery is disconnected or dis-
charged, the gear selector lever will
remain locked in park position P. Con-
tact an authorized smart center for
assistance or call Roadside Assistance.
Towing eye bolt
The towing eye bolt is located in the
passenger footwell under the carpet.
X
Unscrew the carpet holder in the
passenger footwell (Y page 158).
X
Lift the carpet.
X
Take out towing eye bolt :.
Installing towing eye bolt
Depending of whether you are towing a
vehicle or being towed, the towing eye bolt
can be screwed into threaded holes which
are located behind covers on the front and
rear bumper.
Front cover
G
WARNING
High outside temperature, stop-and-go
traffic, driving on long uphill grades, or
driving at high engine speed may increase
the temperature in the engine compart-
ment. Therefore the area around the air
slots in the rear apron may be hot. Let the
engine cool off before touching this area
to prevent burns.
Rear covers
X
Remove respective cover : or ; using
a suitable object to reveal the threaded
hole for the towing eye bolt.
Towing
203
>> Practical hints.
* optional
Z
X
Screw towing eye bolt in clockwise to its
stop and tighten with a suitable object.
G
WARNING
For safety reasons, recovery or lashing
down of the vehicle by means of the towing
eye is not allowed. Failure to observe this
could result in the towing eye being ripped
out of its mounting and people being
injured.
Towing the vehicle
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Connect the strap or tow bar to the towing
eye.
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Depress the brake pedal and keep it
pressed.
X
Move the gear selector lever to neutral
position N.
X
Release the brake pedal.
i
With the gear selector lever in neutral
position N, the key cannot be turned fully
to starter switch position 0. Therefore
turn the key in the starter switch as far
left as it will go when switching off the
ignition.
X
Switch off the ignition.
X
Leave the key in the starter switch.
X
Switch on the hazard warning flasher.
X
Release the parking brake.
Flat towing
Flat towing is when all wheels of the vehi-
cle are on the ground during the tow.
For vehicles that will be flat towed over
long distances observe the following rec-
ommendations:
X
Preparing the vehicle: Contact an
authorized smart center for information
on recommended tow bar equipment and
installing a matching on/off switch on
the battery terminal.
X
Before towing: Make sure the ignition is
switched on.
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Depress the brake pedal and keep it
pressed.
X
Move the gear selector lever to neutral
position N.
X
Release the brake pedal.
i
With the gear selector lever in neutral
position N, the key cannot be turned fully
to starter switch position 0. Therefore
turn the key in the starter switch as far
left as it will go when switching off the
ignition.
X
Switch off the ignition.
X
Leave the key in the starter switch.
X
Wait approximately 30 seconds until the
multifunction display in the instrument
cluster is completely blank.
X
Turn the battery off using the previously
installed battery switch.
X
Release the parking brake.
X
During towing: Make sure the gear selec-
tor lever remains in neutral position N
with the ignition switched off.
X
After towing: Engage the parking brake.
X
Turn the battery on using the previously
installed battery switch.
X
Move the gear selector lever to park
position P.
X
Remove the key from the starter switch.
X
Lock the doors.
!
Do not flat tow the vehicle with the front
axle raised. Doing so may cause serious
damage to the brake system which is not
covered by the smart Limited Warranty.
!
Failure to follow the recommendations
for flat towing can cause damage to your
vehicle:
R
Not following the battery disconnect
procedure in the proper sequence may
204
Towing
>> Practical hints.
result in data loss in the vehicle’s
control units.
R
Not disconnecting the battery and
leaving the key in starter switch posi-
tion 1 (ignition on) may result in
-
the vehicle locking. The vehicle will
lock if the wheels are turning at
vehicle speeds of approximately
8 mph (14 km/h) or more.
-
the ESP
®
being activated. Active
braking action through the ESP
®
may
seriously damage the brake system
which is not covered by the smart
Limited Warranty.
R
Not moving the gear selector lever to
neutral position N may result in sig-
nificant transmission damage.
R
in a discharged battery.
Fuses
The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve
to switch off malfunctioning power cir-
cuits.
If a fuse is blown, the components and sys-
tems secured by that fuse will stop operat-
ing.
G
WARNING
Only use fuses approved by smart with the
specified amperage for the system in ques-
tion and do not attempt to repair or bridge
a blown fuse this may cause an overload
leading to a fire, and/or cause damage to
electrical components and/or systems.
Contact a smart center if you encounter any
electrical problems.
!
A blown fuse must be replaced by an
appropriate spare fuse (recognizable by
its color or the fuse rating given on the
fuse) of the amperage recommended in
the fuse chart. Any smart center will be
glad to advise you on this subject.
If a newly inserted fuse blows again, have
the cause determined and rectified at an
authorized smart center.
Before replacing fuses:
R
Engage the parking brake.
R
Make sure the gear selector lever is in
park position P.
R
Turn off all electrical accessories.
R
Turn off the engine.
R
Remove the key from the starter switch.
Replacing a fuse
The fuse box is located on the driver’s side
below the dashboard.
X
From the fuse chart (Y page 207), deter-
mine which fuse belongs to the malfunc-
tioning accessory or component.
X
Remove the respective fuse.
X
Replace the defective fuse with a new one
of the same amperage.
Fuses
205
>> Practical hints.
Z
Fuse box
Front side
: - \
Fuse
y - ¥
Backup fuse slots
206
Fuses
>> Practical hints.
Rear side
^ - ©
Fuse
Fuse chart
No. Accessory/Component Amperage Color
:
Engine 25 A Neutral
;
Windshield wipers 25 A Neutral
=
Power window (left and right) 20 A Yellow
?
Passenger compartment blower (HVAC) 25 A Neutral
A
Front fog lamps, LED daytime running lamps 10 A Red
B
Right parking lamp, right tail lamp, license
plate lamps
7.5 A Brown
C
Left parking lamp, left tail lamp 7.5 A Brown
D
Engine, tank ventilation 25 A Neutral
E
Engine 7.5 A Brown
Fuses
207
>> Practical hints.
Z
No. Accessory/Component Amperage Color
F
Engine, transmission, shifter 15 A Blue
G
ESP
®
control unit
25 A Neutral
H
Exterior lamp switch, turn signal lamp
switch, cockpit switch module, on-board
diagnostics socket, transmission control
unit, exterior rear view mirror heating,
anti-theft warning system, rain-light sen-
sor, auxiliary instruments, central locking
system, instrument cluster, Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS), brake and turn
signal lamps (left and right)
10 A Red
I
— — —
J
Air conditioning compressor 15 A Blue
K
Audio, subwoofer, sound system, soft top
(cabriolet only), interior light
15 A Blue
L
Fuel pump with fuel level sensor 15 A Blue
M
Rear window wiper (coupé only) 15 A Blue
N
ESP
®
control unit, EPS control unit, restraint
system
10 A Red
O
Engine control unit, transmission control
unit, Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS), on-board diagnostics socket
7.5 A Brown
P
Air conditioning system, exterior rear view
mirror adjustment, washer pump, audio, seat
heating, wiper switch, soft top switch (cab-
riolet only)
10 A Red
Q
Auxiliary power outlet 15 A Blue
R
Left low‑beam headlamp 7.5 A Brown
S
Right low‑beam headlamp 7.5 A Brown
T
Backup lamp 15 A Blue
U
Right high‑beam headlamp 7.5 A Brown
V
Left high‑beam headlamp 7.5 A Brown
W
Engine 7.5 A Brown
X
Rear window defroster 40 A Orange
208
Fuses
>> Practical hints.
No. Accessory/Component Amperage Color
Y
Soft top (cabriolet only) 30 A Green
Z
Transmission control unit, radiator cooling
fan
40 A Orange
\
Horn, central locking system 20 A Yellow
^
— — —
_
Starter switch (ignition) 50 A Red
a
ESP
®
control unit
40 A Orange
©
EPS control unit 30 A Green
y
Exterior rear view mirror heating 7.5 A Brown
z
Brake lamps 7.5 A Brown
|
— — —
~
— — —
¡
Windshield unit car2go 10 A Red
¢
— — —
£
Interior lighting 5 A Light brown
¤
Surround sound system 20 A Yellow
¥
Seat heating control unit 25 A Neutral
Fuses
209
>> Practical hints.
Z
210
>> Technical data.
Parts service .................................. 212
Warranty coverage ............................ 212
Engine electronics ........................... 212
Identification labels ....................... 213
Vehicle specification (model pure) ..... 215
Vehicle specification (model pas-
sion) ............................................. 215
Vehicle specification (model BRA-
BUS) .............................................. 216
Rims and tires ................................ 216
Service fluids and capacities ............ 218
Parts service
The “Technical data” section provides the
necessary technical data for your vehicle.
Genuine smart Parts are subjected to strin-
gent quality inspections. Each part has
been specifically developed, manufac-
tured or selected for and adapted to smart
vehicles.
Therefore, Genuine smart Parts should be
installed.
!
The use of non-genuine smart parts and
accessories not authorized by smart
could damage the vehicle, which is not
covered by the smart Limited Warranty,
or could compromise the vehicle’s dura-
bility or safety.
Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of
the warranties printed in the smart USA
Warranty booklet (USA only) or the Warranty
booklet (Canada only).
Your authorized smart center will exchange
or repair any defective parts originally
installed on the vehicle in accordance with
the terms of the following warranties:
R
smart USA Limited Warranty (USA only)
R
New Vehicle Limited Warranty (Canada
only)
R
Emission System Warranty
R
Emission Performance Warranty
R
Corrosion Warranty
R
California, Connecticut, Maine, Massa-
chusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode
Island, and Vermont Emission Control
System Warranty
R
smartmove Assistance (Canada only)
R
State Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon
Laws, USA only)
Replacement parts and accessories are
covered by the smart Parts and Accessories
warranties, copies of which are available
at any authorized smart center.
Loss of Warranty booklet
Should you lose your smart USA Warranty
booklet (USA only) or the Warranty booklet
(Canada only), have an authorized smart
center arrange for a replacement. It will
be mailed to you.
Engine electronics
Work on engine electronics
G
WARNING
Always have maintenance work on engine
electronics and components performed by a
qualified specialist, e.g. at a smart
center. In particular, work relevant to
safety or on safety related systems must be
carried out at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
!
Always have maintenance work on the
engine electronics and components, such
as control modules, sensors and connect-
ing cables, performed by a qualified
specialist who has the necessary knowl-
edge and tools to carry out the work
required, e.g. at a smart center. Other-
wise there is a danger that vehicle com-
ponents may wear more rapidly, which
may void the vehicle’s warranty.
Retrofitting electrical and electronic
devices
Electrical and electronic devices can
endanger vehicle operating safety.
!
Damage or consequential damage due to
retrofitting a device in the vehicle is
not covered by smart’s warranty.
If you install telephones or radio trans-
mitters in the vehicle you must have such
retrofits approved. smart approves the
212
Engine electronics
>> Technical data.
installation of telephones and radio devi-
ces if the work is done professionally and
the device is connected to a low-reflection
exterior antenna.
The transmitting power of the telephone or
radio must not exceed the following maxi-
mum values.
Frequency range
(band)
Maximum transmit-
ting power (Watts)
Short wave
(<50 MHz)
100
2 m wavelength 50
0.7 m wavelength 35
0.25 m wavelength 10
G
WARNING
Radio transmitters can interfere with the
vehicle’s electronic system, endanger the
operating safety of the vehicle and thus
your own safety, if
R
there is no external antenna
R
the external antenna is not low-reflec-
tion
R
the external antenna is incorrectly
installed
Excessive electromagnetic radiation can
damage your health and that of others.
Using an external antenna addresses and
considers the concerns currently being
discussed in scientific circles about the
health hazards possibly posed by electro-
magnetic fields.
Because of this, have the external antenna
installed exclusively at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop which has the necessary
specialist knowledge and tools to carry out
the work required, e.g. at a smart center. In
particular, work relevant to safety or on
safety-related systems must be carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.
On-board Diagnostics Socket (OBD)
The on-board diagnostics socket is located
inside the vehicle on the right side of the
left footwell.
:
On-board diagnostics socket
Identification labels
Signs and labels
:
Air bag information signs
(sun visor)
;
VIN (engine compartment)
=
Emission control information label,
includes both federal and California
certification exhaust emission stand-
ards (engine compartment)
Identification labels
213
>> Technical data.
Z
?
Heat warning label (engine compart-
ment)
A
Certification label (driver’s door
B‑pillar)
B
Tire and loading information placard
(driver’s door B‑pillar)
C
VIN (lower edge of windshield)
Certification label
X
Open the driver’s door.
:
Certification label (on driver’s door
B‑pillar)
i
Data shown on the example certifica-
tion label are for illustration purpose
only. These data are specific to each
vehicle and may vary from data shown in
the illustration. Refer to certification
label on vehicle for actual data specific
to your vehicle.
Example certification label (U.S. vehicles)
;
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
=
Paintwork code
Example certification label (Canada vehicles)
;
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
=
Paintwork code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
can be found in the following locations:
R
on the certification label on the driver’s
door B‑pillar (Y page 214)
R
on the rear right on the cargo compart-
ment floor (Y page 214)
R
in the lower edge of the windshield
(Y page 213)
X
Open the cargo compartment.
X
Fold back the carpet.
:
VIN (on the cargo compartment floor)
Engine number
The engine number is engraved into the
engine block. For more information, con-
tact any authorized smart center.
214
Identification labels
>> Technical data.
i
When ordering parts, please specify
vehicle identification and engine num-
ber.
Vehicle specification (model pure)
The quoted data apply only to the standard
vehicle. Contact an authorized smart
center for the corresponding data of all
special bodies and special equipment.
Main dimensions (model pure)
Overall vehicle
length
106.1 in (2 695 mm)
Overall vehicle
width
19
69.0 in (1 752 mm)
Overall vehicle
height
61.2 in (1 555 mm)
Wheelbase
73.5 in (1 867 mm)
Turning circle
28.7 ft (8.75 m)
Weights (model pure)
Cargo compart-
ment load
max. 110 lb (50 kg)
Roof load
20
None
G
WARNING
No racks or loads may be secured to the roof
of the vehicle, as
R
the panorama roof* may be damaged, thus
injuring persons
R
this can have a substantial adverse
effect on the driving dynamics of the
vehicle, thus causing accidents
R
the rack and/or the load could detach and
through this cause an accident or other
people could be injured by the load and/
or rack that has fallen off
Vehicle specification (model passion)
The quoted data apply only to the standard
vehicle. Contact an authorized smart
center for the corresponding data of all
special bodies and special equipment.
Main dimensions (model passion)
Overall vehicle
length
106.1 in (2 695 mm)
Overall vehicle
width
21
69.0 in (1 752 mm)
Overall vehicle
height
61.2 in (1 555 mm)
Wheelbase
73.5 in (1 867 mm)
Turning circle
28.7 ft (8.75 m)
Weights (model passion)
Cargo compart-
ment load
max. 110 lb (50 kg)
Roof load
22
None
19
Exterior rear view mirrors folded out.
20
This vehicle is not intended to carry items on its roof. Thus roof rails and any roof-mounted devices
must not be used.
21
Exterior rear view mirrors folded out.
22
This vehicle is not intended to carry items on its roof. Thus roof rails and any roof-mounted devices
must not be used.
Vehicle specification (model passion)
215
>> Technical data.
* optional
Z
G
WARNING
No racks or loads may be secured to the roof
of the vehicle, as
R
the panorama roof* may be damaged, thus
injuring persons
R
this can have a substantial adverse
effect on the driving dynamics of the
vehicle, thus causing accidents
R
the rack and/or the load could detach and
through this cause an accident or other
people could be injured by the load and/
or rack that has fallen off
Vehicle specification (model BRABUS)
The quoted data apply only to the standard
vehicle. Contact an authorized smart
center for the corresponding data of all
special bodies and special equipment.
Main dimensions (model BRABUS)
Overall vehicle
length
107.4 in (2 727 mm)
Overall vehicle
width
23
69.0 in (1 752 mm)
Overall vehicle
height
61.2 in (1 555 mm)
Wheelbase
73.5 in (1 867 mm)
Turning circle
28.7 ft (8.75 m)
Weights (model BRABUS)
Cargo compart-
ment load
max. 110 lb (50 kg)
Roof load
24
None
G
WARNING
No racks or loads may be secured to the roof
of the vehicle, as
R
the panorama roof* may be damaged, thus
injuring persons
R
this can have a substantial adverse
effect on the driving dynamics of the
vehicle, thus causing accidents
R
the rack and/or the load could detach and
through this cause an accident or other
people could be injured by the load and/
or rack that has fallen off
Rims and tires
Notes
!
Only use tires which have been tested
and approved by smart. Tires approved by
smart are developed to provide best pos-
sible performance in conjunction with
the driving safety systems on your vehi-
cle such as the ABS or the ESP
®
.
Using tires other than those approved by
smart may result in damage that is not
covered by the smart Limited Warranty.
!
Using tires other than those approved
by smart can have detrimental effects,
such as
R
poor handling characteristics
R
increased noise
R
increased fuel consumption
Moreover, tires and rims not approved by
smart may, under load, exhibit dimen-
sional variations and different tire
deformation characteristics that could
cause them to come into contact with the
vehicle body or axle parts. Damage to the
tires or the vehicle may be the result.
i
Further information on tires and rims
is available at any authorized smart
23
Exterior rear view mirrors folded out.
24
This vehicle is not intended to carry items on its roof. Thus roof rails and any roof-mounted devices
must not be used.
216
Rims and tires
>> Technical data.
* optional
center. A placard with the recommended
tire inflation pressure is located on the
driver’s door B‑pillar.
The tire inflation pressure should be
checked regularly and should only be
adjusted on cold tires. Follow tire man-
ufacturer’s maintenance recommenda-
tion included with vehicle.
Mobility
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire repair
kit (Y page 186). In case of a flat tire, it
enables you to drive to the nearest author-
ized smart center on the sealed tire.
If the tire is damaged too severely for the
tire sealant to provide a reliable tire
repair:
X
Contact the nearest authorized smart
center.
or
X
Call Roadside Assistance.
Rims and tires
217
>> Technical data.
Z
Mixed size tires
i In the following tables, the models are represented by codes:
R
V1: model pure
R
V2: model passion
R
V3: model BRABUS
Abbreviations used in the following tables:
R
FA: Front Axle
R
RA: Rear Axle
All-season tires Light alloy rims V1 V2 V3
FA 155/60 R 15 74T M+S
4.5 J x 15 H2
25
Wheel offset: 0.93 in (23.5 mm)
# #
—
RA 175/55 R 15 77T M+S
5.5 J x 15 H2
25
Wheel offset: 0.87 in (22 mm)
FA 165/60 R 15 77T M+S 5.0 J x 15 H2
Wheel offset: 1.34 in (34 mm)
# #
—
RA 195/50 R 15 82T M+S 6.5 J x 15 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
FA 175/55 R 15 77T M+S 5.5 J x 15 H2
Wheel offset: 1.18 in (30 mm)
— —
#
RA 215/35 R 17 79H M+S 7.5 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset: 1.30 in (33 mm)
Winter tires
26
Light alloy rims V1 V2 V3
FA 155/60 R 15 74T M+Si 4.5 J x 15 H2
Wheel offset: 0.93 in (23.5 mm)
# # #
RA 175/55 R 15 77T M+Si 5.5 J x 15 H2
Wheel offset: 0.87 in (22 mm)
Service fluids and capacities
Notes
Vehicle components and their respective
lubricants must match. Therefore only use
products tested and approved by smart.
Please contact an authorized smart center
for products tested and approved by smart.
G
WARNING
Comply with all valid regulations with
respect to handling, storing and disposing
25
Model pure only: Available as steel rim or light alloy rim*.
26
Not available as factory equipment.
218
Service fluids and capacities
>> Technical data.
* optional
of service fluids. Otherwise you could
endanger persons or the environment.
Keep service fluids out of the reach of chil-
dren.
For health reasons, you should prevent
service fluids from coming into direct
contact with your skin or clothing.
If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a
physician immediately.
Service fluids and capacities
219
>> Technical data.
Z
Capacities
Components Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants,
etc.
Engine with oil
filter
All models 3.6 US qt (3.4 l) Approved engine oils
Cooling system All models approx. 4.5 US qt (4.3 l) Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
meeting specification
MB 325.0
Fuel tank All models 8.72 US gal (33.0 l) Premium unleaded gasoline
(Minimum Posted Octane 91
[Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON])
Fuel tank
reserve
All models approx. 1.32 US gal (5.0 l)
Air condition-
ing system*
All models — R134a refrigerant and spe-
cial PAG lubricant oil
(never R 12)
Windshield
washer system
All models 4.0 US qt (3.8 l) Windshield washer concen-
trate
27
(Y page 222)
Washer fluid mixing ratio
(Y page 222)
Engine oils
Engine oils are specifically tested for
their suitability in our engines and dura-
bility for our service intervals. There-
fore, only use engine oils and oil filters
required for vehicles with the Mainte-
nance System. For a listing of approved
engine oils and oil filters contact an
authorized smart center.
!
Using engine oils and oil filters of
specification other than those expressly
required for the Maintenance System, or
changing of oil and oil filter at change
intervals longer than those called for by
the Maintenance System will result in
engine or emission control system dam-
age not covered by the smart Limited
Warranty.
Please follow Maintenance System rec-
ommendations for scheduled oil changes.
Failure to do so will result in engine or
emission control system damage not cov-
ered by the smart Limited Warranty.
Viscosity grades for engine oils
Using the chart below, select oil viscosity
according to the lowest air temperature
expected before the next oil change.
27
Use a windshield washer concentrate labeled for summer and water for temperatures above freezing
point or a windshield washer concentrate labeled for winter and water for temperatures below freezing
point.
220
Service fluids and capacities
>> Technical data.
* optional
Engine oil additives
!
Do not blend oil additives with engine
oil. They may damage the engine.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
blending oil additives are not covered
by the smart Limited Warranty. Any
authorized smart center will provide you
with additional information.
Air conditioning refrigerant
R134a (HFC) refrigerant and special
PAG lubricating oil are used in the air
conditioning system.
!
Never use R 12 (CFC) or mineral-based
lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the
system will occur.
Brake fluid
G
WARNING
During vehicle operation, the boiling
point of the brake fluid is continuously
reduced through the absorption of moisture
from the atmosphere. Under extremely
strenuous operating conditions, this mois-
ture content can lead to the formation of
bubbles in the system, thus reducing the
system’s efficiency.
Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced
regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s Mainte-
nance Booklet for replacement interval.
Only brake fluid approved by smart is rec-
ommended. Any authorized smart center
will provide you with additional informa-
tion.
Premium unleaded gasoline
G
WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and poison-
ous. It burns violently and can cause ser-
ious personal injury.
Never allow sparks, flame or smoking mate-
rials near gasoline!
Turn off the engine before refueling.
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
inhaling fumes and skin or clothing con-
tact. Extinguish all smoking materials.
Direct skin contact with fuels and the inha-
lation of fuel vapors are damaging to your
health.
!
To maintain the engine’s durability
and performance, premium unleaded gas-
oline must be used. If premium unleaded
gasoline is not available and low octane
fuel is used, follow these precautions:
R
Have the fuel tank only partially filled
with unleaded regular gasoline and
fill up with premium unleaded gaso-
line as soon as possible.
R
Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt
acceleration.
R
Do not exceed an engine speed of
3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with
a light load such as two persons and no
cargo.
R
Do not exceed
2
/
3
of maximum accel-
erator pedal position if the vehicle is
fully loaded or operating in mountain-
ous terrain.
Fuel requirements
Only use premium unleaded fuel. The octane
number (posted at the pump) must be 91 min.
Service fluids and capacities
221
>> Technical data.
Z
It is an average of both the Research Octane
Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Number
(MON): (RON+MON)/2. This is also known as
the ANTI‑KNOCK INDEX.
Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
used provided the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed
10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is
not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10%
ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be
used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
Gasoline additives
A major concern among engine manufactur-
ers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline.
smart recommends only the use of quality
gasoline containing additives that pre-
vent the build-up of carbon deposits.
After an extended period of using fuels
without such additives carbon deposits can
build up, especially on the intake valves
and in the combustion area, leading to
engine performance problems such as:
R
Warm-up hesitation
R
Unstable idle
R
Knocking/pinging
R
Misfire
R
Power loss
In areas where carbon deposits may be
encountered due to lack of availability of
gasolines which contain these additives,
the use of smart approved additives is rec-
ommended. Contact an authorized smart
center for a listing of approved products.
Follow directions on the product label.
Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel.
This only results in unnecessary costs and
may be harmful to the engine operation.
!
Damage or malfunction resulting from
poor fuel quality or from blending addi-
tional fuel additives other than those
tested and approved by us for use on smart
vehicles are not covered by the smart
Limited Warranty.
Windshield/rear window washer system
During all seasons:
X
Use a windshield washer concentrate
labeled for summer and water for tem-
peratures above freezing point.
X
Use a windshield washer concentrate
labeled for winter and water for temper-
atures below freezing point.
X
Premix the windshield washer fluid in a
suitable container depending on the out-
side temperature and in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions
28
.
Washer fluid mixing ratio
R
Temperature above 32¦ (0¥):
1 part windshield washer concentrate
labeled for summer to 100 parts water
R
Temperature of 14¦ (-10¥):
1 part windshield washer concentrate
labeled for winter to 2 parts water
R
Temperature of -4¦ (-20¥):
1 part windshield washer concentrate
labeled for winter to 1 part water
G
WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate is highly
flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking
are prohibited when windshield washer
concentrate is being handled.
28
Refer to the notes for use on the container.
222
Service fluids and capacities
>> Technical data.
Coolants
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which pro-
vides:
R
Corrosion protection
R
Freeze protection
R
Boiling protection (by increasing the
boiling point)
The cooling system was filled at the factory
with a coolant providing freeze protection
to approximately -35¦ (-37¥) and cor-
rosion protection.
!
Add premixed coolant solution only.
Adding water and MB 325.0 Anticorro-
sion/Antifreeze separately from each
other, could cause engine damage not
covered by the smart Limited Warranty.
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to
-35¦ (-37¥), the boiling point of the
coolant in the pressurized cooling system
is reached at approximately 266¦
(130¥ ).
The coolant solution must be used year
round, even in countries which have high
temperatures to provide the necessary cor-
rosion protection and increase boil‑over
protection. Refer to Maintenance/ Service
Booklet for replacement interval.
Coolant system design and coolant used
determine the replacement interval. The
replacement interval published in the
Maintenance booklet is only applicable if
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze solu-
tion or other smart approved products of
equal specification are used to renew the
coolant concentration or bring it back up
to the proper level.
For information on other smart approved
products of equal specification, contact an
authorized smart center.
To provide important corrosion protec-
tion, the solution must be at least 50% anti-
corrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to freeze
protection to approximately -35¦
[-37¥]).
If you use a solution that is more than 55%
anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protec-
tion to approximately -49¦ [(-45¥]), the
engine temperature will increase due to
the lower heat transfer capability of the
solution. Therefore, do not use more than
this amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
If the coolant level is low, water and
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should
be used to bring it up to the proper level
(have cooling system checked for signs of
leakage). Please make sure the mixture is
in accordance with label instructions.
Always use anticorrosion/antifreeze that
has been approved by smart. For informa-
tion contact an authorized smart center.
The water in the cooling system must meet
minimum requirements, which are usually
satisfied by normal drinking water.
If you are not sure about the water quality,
consult an authorized smart center.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of alumi-
num parts. The use of aluminum components
in motor vehicle engines necessitates that
anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in
such engines be specifically formulated to
protect the aluminum parts.
Failure to use such anticorrosion/anti-
freeze coolant will result in a signifi-
cantly shortened service life.
Therefore, the following product is
strongly recommended for use in your vehi-
cle: MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
agent.
Before the start of the winter season (or
once a year in hot southern regions), you
should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
concentration checked.
The coolant is also regularly checked each
time you bring your vehicle to an author-
ized smart center for service.
Service fluids and capacities
223
>> Technical data.
Z
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity:
Approximate freeze protection
-35¦¦ (-37¥¥) -49¦¦ (-45¥¥)
Cooling system
2.27 US qt (2.15 l) 2.50 US qt (2.37 l)
224
Service fluids and capacities
>> Technical data.
… 209 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Smart for two 2014 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Smart for two 2014 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 28,65 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info